WO2023024565A1 - Method for switching sound mode, and electronic device - Google Patents

Method for switching sound mode, and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023024565A1
WO2023024565A1 PCT/CN2022/091028 CN2022091028W WO2023024565A1 WO 2023024565 A1 WO2023024565 A1 WO 2023024565A1 CN 2022091028 W CN2022091028 W CN 2022091028W WO 2023024565 A1 WO2023024565 A1 WO 2023024565A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
user
mode
preset
mobile phone
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/091028
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
毛璐
Original Assignee
荣耀终端有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 荣耀终端有限公司 filed Critical 荣耀终端有限公司
Publication of WO2023024565A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023024565A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M19/00—Current supply arrangements for telephone systems
    • H04M19/02—Current supply arrangements for telephone systems providing ringing current or supervisory tones, e.g. dialling tone or busy tone
    • H04M19/04—Current supply arrangements for telephone systems providing ringing current or supervisory tones, e.g. dialling tone or busy tone the ringing-current being generated at the substations
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72448—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72448—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions
    • H04M1/72451—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions according to schedules, e.g. using calendar applications
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72448—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions
    • H04M1/72454—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions according to context-related or environment-related conditions
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72448—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions
    • H04M1/72457—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions according to geographic location
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/725—Cordless telephones
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular to a voice mode switching method and electronic equipment.
  • a ringing mode In electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets, there are usually three sound modes: a ringing mode, a vibrating mode and a silent mode.
  • a ring mode can avoid missed calls, but the ringing is very likely to disturb the people around. Especially in a quiet or indoor environment, the interference to the surrounding people is particularly prominent.
  • vibration mode or silent mode can avoid disturbing people around, but it is easy to cause missed calls. Especially in noisy or outdoor environments, the possibility of missed calls is even greater.
  • the present application provides a voice mode switching method and an electronic device, which can intelligently recognize a user's switching intention and push a switching prompt, thereby improving the efficiency of voice mode switching.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for switching a sound mode, and the method may be applied to an electronic device.
  • the electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode. Moreover, this method is mainly used in the scene where the silent mode or the vibration mode is switched to the ringing mode.
  • the electronic device obtains the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device, and the scene information includes the environmental sound of the environment where the electronic device is located.
  • the electronic device displays a prompt message (that is, the first prompt message) for Request user confirmation to switch to ring mode. Therefore, the user may be automatically prompted to switch the ringing mode when the condition is met.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition includes: the ambient sound rises from the volume range of the quiet environment (recorded as the first volume range) to the volume range of the noisy environment (recorded as the second volume range).
  • the ambient sound rises from the first volume range to the second volume range, it indicates that the mobile phone moves from a relatively quiet environment to a relatively relatively noisy environment.
  • the electronic device receives the user's first operation on the first prompt message (such as the click operation on the "confirm” button), it can switch the sound mode to the ringing mode.
  • the electronic device can identify whether the electronic device needs to switch to the ringing mode when it is in the silent mode or the vibration mode. Thereby, the intelligent identification of the need to switch the electronic device to the ringing mode can be realized. Moreover, when it is recognized that the conditions for switching to the ring mode are met (for example, the electronic device moves from a quiet environment to a noisy environment), the electronic device can automatically prompt the user to confirm whether to switch to the ring mode, so that the switching of the sound mode is accurate. Meet the needs of users. After the user confirms by prompting, the electronic device can switch to the ringing mode. There is no need for the user to perform multi-step operations (as shown in FIG. 1 ) to realize switching. In this way, the electronic device can improve the intelligence and convenience of switching from the silent mode or the vibration mode to the ringing mode.
  • the scene information further includes indication information (denoted as first indication information) for indicating whether the electronic device is connected to the wearable device.
  • the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses. If the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not met. In this case, the electronic device can prompt the user for an incoming call, message, etc. through the wearable device, usually without causing missed calls, messages, and the like. This eliminates the need to switch to ring mode to alert. Conversely, if the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is not connected to the wearable device, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is met. In this case, the electronic device needs to switch to a ringing mode to prompt the user for incoming calls and messages.
  • the electronic device can determine the scenario that the electronic device is not connected to the wearable device as a scenario that satisfies switching to the ringing mode. In this way, missed calls or messages caused by not connecting the wearable device can be avoided.
  • the scene information further includes indication information (denoted as second indication information) for indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user.
  • the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses. If the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn by the user, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not met. In this case, the electronic device can prompt the user for an incoming call, message, etc. through the wearable device, usually without causing missed calls, messages, and the like. This eliminates the need to switch to ring mode to alert. On the contrary, if the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is not worn by the user, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is met. In this case, even if the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the connection may be missed because the wearable device is not worn by the user, and thus needs to be switched to a ringing mode for prompting.
  • the electronic device can determine a scene where the wearable device is not worn on the user's body as a scene that satisfies switching to the ringing mode. In this way, missed calls or messages due to the wearable device not being worn can be avoided.
  • the electronic device may be identified by only one of the indication information.
  • the first indication information can be identified first, and when the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the second indication information can be further identified, and then The second indication information indicates that the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not satisfied until the wearable device is worn on the user's body.
  • the scene information further includes indication information (denoted as third indication information) for indicating whether the electronic device is in use.
  • the electronic device being in use includes one or more of the following situations: first, the electronic device is in a bright screen state. In the second type, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device. In the third type, the electronic device detects a user's touch operation on the screen of the electronic device. Fourth, when the environment where the electronic device is located is dark, the electronic device is likely to be located in a closed space such as a backpack or a pocket. In this scenario, the electronic device is usually not in use.
  • the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment it belongs to is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the electronic device is smaller than the preset acceleration. If the third indication information indicates that the electronic device is in one or more of the above four situations, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not met. In this case, the electronic device is in use, and there is usually no missed call. Conversely, if the third indication information indicates that the electronic device is not in any of the above situations, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is met. In this case, the electronic device may be missed due to the situation such as being placed in a backpack.
  • the electronic device can determine the scenario that the electronic device is not in use as the scenario that satisfies switching to the ringing mode. Thereby, missed calls or messages due to not noticing the screen of the mobile phone can be avoided.
  • the scene information also includes the type of environment to which the environment belongs, and the type of environment includes meeting rooms, offices, hospitals, restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, cinemas, playgrounds, and shopping malls.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: changing the environment type from a non-preset type to a preset type.
  • the preset types include restaurants, carriages, roadsides, plazas, amusement parks and/or shopping malls.
  • the electronic device recognizes the scene where the electronic device moves from a quiet environment such as a hospital or an office to a noisy environment such as a roadside or a square as a scene that needs to be switched to the ringing mode. Scenes, so that after a specific change in the environment type, it can prompt to switch to the ring mode in time.
  • the electronic device before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, the electronic device monitors the first environmental parameter of the environment where the electronic device is located; wherein, the first environmental parameter is Parameters that need to be collected in time and require low power consumption, such as Wi-Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list, and/or light intensity.
  • the electronic device is triggered to obtain the current scene information of the electronic device only when a preset change occurs to the first environmental parameter.
  • the preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device is disconnected from the second Wi-Fi
  • the open state changes to be connected to the second Wi-Fi, wherein the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi can be any Wi-Fi; and/or, the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is determined by the first Wi-Fi -The Fi list changes to the second Wi-Fi list, there is at least one different Wi-Fi in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list; and/or, the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located is changed from the first intensity The value changes to a second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value.
  • the scene information can be acquired conditionally by triggering. There is no need to obtain scene information periodically or in real time. It should be understood that acquiring scene information (such as ambient sound) requires relatively high power consumption, and conditional acquisition can reduce power consumption of electronic devices.
  • the electronic device before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, the electronic device monitors whether there is a missed call within the first preset time. The electronic device is triggered to obtain the current scene information of the electronic device only when there is a missed call in the electronic device within the first preset time period.
  • scene information is obtained conditionally, without the need to obtain scene information periodically or in real time. It should be understood that acquiring scene information (such as ambient sound) requires relatively high power consumption, and conditional acquisition can reduce power consumption of electronic devices.
  • the electronic device before the electronic device displays the first prompt information, acquires a user portrait of the user.
  • the user portrait includes a first number, and the first number is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the user's operation within the second preset time period.
  • the electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition.
  • the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition, including: the first number of times is greater than the first preset number of times. If the first count is greater than the first preset count, it indicates that the user has a habit of switching sound modes, rather than a user who has been using silent mode or vibration mode for a long time.
  • the electronic device only when the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition (for example, the first number is greater than the first preset number), the electronic device will prompt the first prompt information. In this way, effective push can be realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
  • the second preset condition for example, the first number is greater than the first preset number
  • the user portrait further includes a second number of times, where the second number is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the first operation within a third preset time period.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count. If the second number of times is greater than the second preset number of times, it indicates that the user can accept the way of switching the sound mode by pushing the prompt information. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
  • the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device responds to the user when the ambient sound is greater than the first decibel within the fourth preset time period.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times. If the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times, it indicates that the user tends to switch to the ringing mode when the ambient sound is high, rather than switching the sound mode at will. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
  • the electronic device does not display the first prompt information. In this way, invalid pushes can be avoided. For example, it is possible to avoid pushing the first prompt information to users who have not switched sound modes for many years.
  • the electronic device displays the first prompt information, including: the electronic device displays the first prompt information on the lock screen interface of the electronic device; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device Display the first prompt message on top.
  • the electronic device can ensure that the prompt information displayed on the lock screen interface is viewed by the user, thereby increasing the reach rate of the information.
  • the displaying of the first prompt information by the electronic device includes: when the interface currently displayed by the electronic device is the main interface or the application interface of the electronic device, when the electronic device detects that the user's When the pupil is looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
  • the electronic device can display the first prompt information only when it detects that the user is looking at the screen, and can also increase the reach rate of the information.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method for switching sound modes, and the method may be applied to electronic devices.
  • the electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode.
  • this method is mainly used in a scene where the ring mode is switched to a silent mode or a vibration mode.
  • the electronic device obtains the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device.
  • the scene information includes ambient sound of the environment where the electronic device is located.
  • the sound mode is the silent mode or the vibration mode, if the scene information satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition includes: the ambient sound drops from the second volume range to the first volume range; the first prompt message is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ring mode.
  • the electronic device switches the sound mode to a silent mode or a vibration mode.
  • the electronic device can identify whether the electronic device needs to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode when it is in the ringing mode. Thereby, the intelligent recognition of the demand for switching the electronic device to the silent mode or the vibration mode can be realized. Moreover, when it is recognized that the conditions for switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode are met (for example, the electronic device moves from a noisy environment to a quiet environment), the electronic device may automatically prompt the user to confirm whether to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode to make the sound The switching of modes accurately meets the needs of users. After the user confirms through a prompt, the electronic device can switch to a silent mode or a vibration mode. There is no need for the user to perform multi-step operations to achieve switching. In this way, the intelligence and convenience of switching from the ring mode to the silent mode or the vibration mode can be improved.
  • the scene information also includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is connected to a wearable device; wherein, the wearable device includes a bracelet, an earphone, a smart At least one of a watch and smart glasses.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device. If the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the wearable device may prompt an incoming call or a notification message without ringing a bell.
  • the electronic device can determine the scenario where the electronic device is connected to the wearable device as a scenario that satisfies switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
  • the scene information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the wearable device is worn on the user.
  • the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn on the user. If the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn on the user's body, the wearable device may be used to prompt an incoming call or a notification message without ringing a bell.
  • the electronic device can determine the scene where the wearable device is worn on the user's body as a scene that satisfies switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
  • the scene information further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is in use.
  • the electronic device being in use includes: the electronic device is in a bright screen state; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user touches the screen of the electronic device operation; and/or, the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the electronic device is less than the preset acceleration.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is in use. It should be understood that if the electronic device is in use, incoming calls or notification messages can be checked in time, so that there is no need to ring the alarm.
  • the electronic device can determine the scene in the use state as a scene that satisfies switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
  • the scene information also includes the type of environment to which the environment belongs, and the type of environment includes conference rooms, offices, hospitals, restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, cinemas, playgrounds, and shopping malls.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition also includes: changing the environment type from a preset type to a non-preset type; wherein, the preset type includes restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds and/or shopping malls.
  • the electronic device recognizes that the scene where the electronic device moves from a roadside, a plaza, and other environments with high noises to an environment that requires quiet, such as a hospital or an office, needs to be switched to the silent mode. Or the scene of the vibration mode, so that after a specific change in the environment type, it can prompt to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode in time.
  • the electronic device before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, it further includes: the electronic device monitors a first environmental parameter of the environment where the electronic device is located; wherein the first environmental parameter includes Wi- Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list and/or light intensity.
  • obtaining the current scene information of the electronic device includes: obtaining the current scene information of the electronic device when a preset change occurs in the first environmental parameter.
  • the preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device is disconnected from the second Wi-Fi Change to connecting with the second Wi-Fi, wherein, the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi can be any Wi-Fi.
  • the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is changed from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and there is at least one different Wi-Fi list in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list.
  • the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located changes from the first intensity value to the second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value.
  • the preset change occurs to the above-mentioned first environmental parameter, it indicates that there is a certain change in the environment. At this time, there may be a need to switch the sound mode.
  • the scene information can be acquired conditionally by triggering. There is no need to obtain scene information periodically or in real time. It should be understood that acquiring scene information (such as ambient sound) requires relatively high power consumption, and conditional acquisition can reduce power consumption of electronic devices.
  • the electronic device before the electronic device displays the first prompt information, it further includes: the electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user; wherein, the user portrait includes the first number, and the first number is the electronic The number of times the device switches sound modes in response to user operations within the first preset time period.
  • the electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition; wherein, the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition, including: the first number of times is greater than the first preset number of times.
  • the electronic device will prompt the first prompt information only when the user portrait satisfies that the first count is greater than the first preset count. In this way, effective push can be realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
  • the user portrait further includes a second number of times, and the second number of times is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the first operation within a second preset time period.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count. If the second number of times is greater than the second preset number of times, it indicates that the user can accept the method of switching the sound mode by pushing the prompt information. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
  • the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device responds to the user's voice when the ambient sound is less than the first decibel within the third preset time period.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times. If the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times, it indicates that the user tends to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode when the ambient sound is low, rather than switching the sound mode at will. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
  • the method further includes: if the user profile does not meet the second preset condition, the electronic device does not display the first prompt information. In this way, invalid pushes can be avoided. For example, it is possible to avoid pushing the first prompt information to users who have not switched sound modes for many years.
  • the electronic device displays the first prompt information, including: the electronic device displays the first prompt information on the lock screen interface of the electronic device; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device Display the first prompt message on top.
  • the electronic device can ensure that the prompt information displayed on the lock screen interface is viewed by the user, thereby increasing the reach rate of the information.
  • the displaying of the first prompt information by the electronic device includes: when the interface currently displayed by the electronic device is the main interface or the application interface of the electronic device, when the electronic device detects that the user's When the pupil is looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
  • the electronic device can display the first prompt information only when it detects that the user is looking at the screen, and can also increase the reach rate of the information.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, and the electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode.
  • Electronic devices include a display, memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions.
  • the electronic device When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device performs the following steps: the electronic device acquires the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device ; Wherein, the sound mode is a silent mode, a vibration mode or a ringing mode; the scene information includes the environmental sound of the environment where the electronic device is located;
  • the electronic device displays first prompt information; wherein, the scene information satisfies a first preset condition.
  • a preset condition includes: the ambient sound rises from the first volume range to the second volume range; the first prompt message is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ringing mode;
  • the electronic device switches the sound mode to the ringing mode in response to a user's first operation on the first prompt information.
  • the scene information further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is connected to a wearable device; wherein, the wearable The device includes at least one of a bracelet, earphones, smart watch and smart glasses.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is not connected to the wearable device.
  • the scene information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the wearable device is worn on the user; wherein, the wearable device The device includes at least one of a bracelet, earphones, smart watch and smart glasses.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the second indication information indicating that the wearable device is not worn by the user.
  • the scene information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is in use.
  • the electronic device being in use includes: the electronic device is in a bright screen state. And/or, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device. And/or, the electronic device detects a user's touch operation on the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than a first preset intensity, and the electronic The acceleration of the device is less than the preset acceleration.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the third indication information indicating that the electronic device is not in use.
  • the scene information further includes the environment type to which the environment belongs, and the environment type includes conference room, office, hospital, restaurant, carriage, roadside, square, movie theater, Variety in playgrounds and malls.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: changing the environment type from a non-preset type to a preset type; wherein, the preset type includes restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds and / or mall.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed by the following step: the electronic device monitors the first Environmental parameters; wherein, the first environmental parameters include Wi-Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list and/or light intensity. Acquiring current scene information of the electronic device when the first environmental parameter undergoes a preset change.
  • the preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi Being disconnected from the second Wi-Fi is changed to being connected to the second Wi-Fi, wherein the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi may be any Wi-Fi.
  • the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is changed from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list exist at least A different Wi-Fi.
  • the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located changes from a first intensity value to a second intensity value, and an absolute value of a difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: the electronic device monitors that the electronic device is in the first preset Whether there are missed calls within the time. If there is a missed call in the electronic device within the first preset time period, the current scene information of the electronic device is acquired.
  • the missed calls do not include calls marked as harassment and/or calls in the blacklist.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user; wherein, the The user portrait includes a first count, and the first count is the number of times the electronic device switches sound modes in response to user operations within a second preset time period. The electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies a second preset condition. Wherein, the user portrait satisfies a second preset condition, including: the first count is greater than the first preset count.
  • the user portrait further includes a second number of times, the second number is the electronic device responding to the first operation within the third preset time period. Number of times to switch sound modes.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count.
  • the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device, within a fourth preset period of time, has an ambient sound greater than the first decibel case, the number of times the user switched to ring mode in response to an action by the user.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third count is greater than the third preset count.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: if the user portrait does not meet the second preset condition, the The electronic device does not display the first prompt information.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed the following step: the electronic device is in the lock screen interface of the electronic device displaying the first prompt information; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device displays the first prompt information on top.
  • the electronic device when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: the interface currently displayed on the electronic device is the In the case of the main interface or the application interface of , when the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, and the electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode.
  • Electronic devices include a display, memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program codes.
  • the computer program codes include computer instructions.
  • the electronic device executes the following steps: the electronic device acquires the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device.
  • the scene information includes ambient sound of the environment where the electronic device is located.
  • the sound mode is the silent mode or the vibration mode, if the scene information satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition includes: the ambient sound drops from the second volume range to the first volume range; the first prompt message is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ring mode.
  • the electronic device switches the sound mode to a silent mode or a vibration mode.
  • the scene information also includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is connected to a wearable device; wherein, the wearable device includes a bracelet, an earphone, a smart At least one of a watch and smart glasses.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device.
  • the scene information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the wearable device is worn on the user.
  • the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn on the user.
  • the scene information further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is in use.
  • the electronic device being in use includes: the electronic device is in a bright screen state; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user touches the screen of the electronic device operation; and/or, the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the electronic device is less than the preset acceleration.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is in use.
  • the scene information also includes the type of environment to which the environment belongs.
  • the scene information meeting the first preset condition also includes: changing the environment type from a preset type to a non-preset type; wherein, the preset type includes restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds and/or shopping malls.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the electronic device monitors a first environmental parameter of the environment where the electronic device is located; wherein , the first environment parameter includes Wi-Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list and/or light intensity. Acquiring current scene information of the electronic device when a preset change occurs to the first environmental parameter.
  • the preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device is disconnected from the second Wi-Fi Change to connecting with the second Wi-Fi, wherein, the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi can be any Wi-Fi.
  • the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is changed from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and there is at least one different Wi-Fi list in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list.
  • the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located changes from the first intensity value to the second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value.
  • the electronic device when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user; wherein the user portrait includes the first A number, the first number is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the user's operation within the first preset time period.
  • the electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition; wherein, the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition, including: the first number of times is greater than the first preset number of times.
  • the user portrait further includes a second number of times, and the second number of times is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the first operation within a second preset time period.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count.
  • the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device responds to the user's voice when the ambient sound is less than the second decibel within the third preset time period.
  • the user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: if the user portrait does not meet the second preset condition, the electronic device does not Display the first prompt message.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed by the following step: the electronic device displays the first prompt on the lock screen interface of the electronic device information; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device will display the first prompt message on top.
  • the electronic device when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the interface currently displayed on the electronic device is the main interface of the electronic device or In the case of an application interface, when the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which is applied to an electronic device including a display screen and a memory; the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors; the interface The circuit and the processor are interconnected by a line; the interface circuit is configured to receive a signal from a memory of the electronic device and send the signal to the processor, the signal including computer instructions stored in the memory; When the processor executes the computer instruction, the electronic device executes the method described in the first aspect, the second aspect and any possible design manner thereof.
  • the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions.
  • the server executes the method described in the first aspect, the second solution and any possible design thereof .
  • the present application provides a computer program product that, when running on a server, causes the server to execute the method described in the first aspect, the second solution and any possible design thereof.
  • the electronic device described in the second aspect, the system chip described in the third aspect, the computer storage medium described in the fourth aspect, and the computer program product described in the fifth aspect provided above are all used to execute
  • the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the beneficial effects of the corresponding methods provided above, and will not be repeated here.
  • Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of one of the mobile phone interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 shows a flow chart of one of the voice mode switching methods provided by the embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 shows a flow chart of the second method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application
  • Fig. 5 shows a schematic diagram of the second mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of a mobile phone in an off-screen state provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Fig. 7 shows a schematic diagram of the third mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 shows a schematic diagram of the fourth mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 9 shows a schematic diagram of the fifth mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 shows a flowchart of the third method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 shows a flowchart of the fourth method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12 shows a schematic diagram of the sixth mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 13 shows a schematic diagram of the seventh mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 shows a flowchart of the fifth method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 shows a flowchart of the sixth method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 shows a structural diagram of a system chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, “plurality” means two or more.
  • the following first takes the electronic device as a mobile phone as an example, and describes conventional technical means in conjunction with FIG. 1 .
  • step a the user needs to unlock the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone may display the interface 101 shown in (a) in FIG. 1 .
  • step b the user needs to slide down to call out the notification bar, which includes an adjustment control, which is used to trigger the mobile phone to adjust the sound mode.
  • the mobile phone may display the interface 102 shown in (b) in FIG. 1 in response to the user's sliding operation on the interface 101 shown in (a) in FIG. 1 .
  • the interface 102 includes a notification bar 103
  • the notification bar 103 includes an adjustment control 104 .
  • the adjustment control 104 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch the sound mode.
  • the adjustment control 104 indicates that the current sound mode is the silent mode.
  • the mobile phone may display the interface 105 shown in (c) in FIG.
  • the interface 105 includes a notification bar 106
  • the notification bar 106 includes an adjustment control 107 .
  • the adjustment control 107 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch the sound mode.
  • the adjustment control 107 indicates that the current sound mode is the ring mode. So far, the switch from the silent mode to the ringing mode is completed.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a sound mode switching method, which is applied to an electronic device, and the electronic device can support a ring mode, a vibration mode and a silent mode.
  • the electronic device can acquire status information and environment information of the electronic device.
  • the state information may be used to indicate states such as sound mode and/or position of the electronic device.
  • the status information may be that the electronic device is currently in a silent mode.
  • Environmental information may be used to indicate the environment in which the electronic device is located.
  • the environment may be an indoor environment, a roadside environment.
  • the environment may be a noisy environment or a quiet environment.
  • the electronic device can recognize the user's intention to switch the sound mode according to the above state information and environment information, so as to realize intelligent identification of the switching intention.
  • the electronic device can actively display the switching prompt.
  • the switch prompt is used to prompt to switch the sound mode, and can also be used to trigger the electronic device to switch the sound mode. In this way, the prompt message can provide the user with a quick entry to switch the sound mode.
  • the electronic equipment in the embodiment of the present application can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a desktop, a laptop, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook, and a cellular Telephone, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) ⁇ virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment and other equipment, the embodiment of the present application does not make special restrictions on the specific form of the equipment.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mobile phone 200 may include a processor 210, an external memory interface 220, an internal memory 221, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 230, and a charging management module 240 , power management module 241, battery 242, antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 250, wireless communication module 260, audio module 270, speaker 270A, receiver 270B, microphone 270C, earphone jack 270D, sensor module 280, button 290, motor 291, an indicator 292, a camera 293, a display screen 294, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 295, etc.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the structure shown in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the mobile phone 200 .
  • the mobile phone 200 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 210 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 210 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit, NPU
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the handset 200 .
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 210 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 210 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 210 has just used or recycled. If the processor 210 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 210 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
  • the charging management module 240 is configured to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 240 can receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 230 .
  • the charging management module 240 can receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the mobile phone 200 . While the charging management module 240 is charging the battery 242 , it can also provide power for the mobile phone through the power management module 241 .
  • the power management module 241 is used for connecting the battery 242 , the charging management module 240 and the processor 210 .
  • the power management module 241 receives the input from the battery 242 and/or the charging management module 240 to provide power for the processor 210 , internal memory 221 , external memory, display screen 294 , camera 293 , and wireless communication module 260 .
  • the power management module 241 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 241 can also be set in the processor 210.
  • the power management module 241 and the charging management module 240 may also be set in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the mobile phone 200 can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 250, the wireless communication module 260, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
  • the mobile phone 200 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 294, and the application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 294 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 210 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 294 is used to display images, videos and the like.
  • the display screen 294 is the above-mentioned folding screen (such as a flexible folding screen or a multi-screen folding screen).
  • Display 294 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED active matrix organic light emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed
  • the mobile phone 200 can realize the shooting function through ISP, camera 293 , video codec, GPU, display screen 294 and APP processor.
  • the external memory interface 220 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the mobile phone 200.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 210 through the external memory interface 220 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other media files in the external memory card.
  • the internal memory 221 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions.
  • the processor 210 executes various functions APP and data processing of the mobile phone 200 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 221 .
  • the internal memory 221 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data.
  • the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the mobile phone 200 .
  • the internal memory 221 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
  • the mobile phone 200 can realize the audio function through the audio module 270, the speaker 270A, the receiver 270B, the microphone 270C, the earphone interface 270D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the keys 290 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
  • the key 290 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the mobile phone 200 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile phone 200 .
  • the motor 291 can generate a vibrating reminder.
  • the motor 291 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications may correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 291 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 294 .
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 292 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, the change of the battery capacity, and also can be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications and so on.
  • the SIM card interface 295 is used for connecting a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 295 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 295 to realize contact and separation with the mobile phone 200 .
  • the mobile phone 200 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 295 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 295 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the mobile phone 200 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication.
  • the mobile phone 200 adopts eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the mobile phone 200 and cannot be separated from the mobile phone 200 .
  • the mobile phone can intelligently recognize the user's intention to switch the sound mode according to the status information and environmental information of the mobile phone.
  • the status information is used to indicate the sound mode adopted by the mobile phone and/or the status such as location
  • the environment information is used to indicate the environment where the mobile phone is located, including environmental sound and/or environmental location.
  • the mobile phone displays a switching prompt. In this way, the user is provided with a shortcut to switch to mode 1.
  • the mobile phone can switch the sound mode to mode 1 in response to the user's one-step operation on the switching prompt. This simplifies the process of switching sound modes and improves the convenience of switching.
  • state information and environment information other than the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone may be collectively referred to as scene information.
  • the switch intention mainly includes the following two types: first, the intention to switch from silent mode or vibration mode to ring mode (denoted as scene 1), or the intention to switch from ring mode to silent mode or vibration mode (denoted as scene 2).
  • switching sound modes refers to switching from silent mode or vibration mode to ring mode, that is, mode 1 is ring mode.
  • the method includes S301-S307.
  • the mobile phone monitors whether a preset environmental parameter of the environment where the mobile phone is located undergoes a preset change. If yes, execute S302; if not, continue to execute S301.
  • the preset environment parameter may also be referred to as the first environment parameter.
  • the preset environmental parameters are parameters that can reflect environmental conditions.
  • the preset environmental parameters may be one or more of light intensity, color temperature, Wi-Fi connection status and Wi-Fi list. If the preset environment parameter changes, it indicates that the environment in which the mobile phone is located has changed significantly. In this case, it can be preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode.
  • the aforementioned preset environmental parameters may be environmental parameters that require relatively low power consumption during collection, for example, the preset environmental parameters are Wi-Fi connection conditions.
  • the aforementioned preset environmental parameters may be environmental parameters that need to be collected daily during the operation of the mobile phone, for example, the preset environmental parameters are light intensity. Therefore, the acquisition of the aforementioned preset environmental parameters does not require any additional power consumption.
  • the mobile phone detects the preset environmental parameters of its environment, and only executes S302 when the preset environmental parameters change, and further collects information (such as status information, environmental information) in a targeted manner and identifies the user's switching intention. Otherwise, continue to monitor the changes of the preset environmental parameters.
  • the process of collecting state information and environment information and the process of identifying switching intentions are usually processes with high power consumption. For example, the power consumption of collecting environmental sounds is extremely high. In this way, the mobile phone can perform targeted processing processes with high power consumption, thereby greatly reducing the power consumption of the mobile phone.
  • the following takes the preset environmental parameters of light intensity, Wi-Fi connection status and Wi-Fi list as examples to illustrate the specific implementation of whether the preset environmental parameters of the mobile phone monitor its environment.
  • the preset environmental parameters include light intensity.
  • the mobile phone can monitor whether the change value of the light intensity (usually refers to an absolute value, such as an increase value or a decrease value) exceeds a preset value. If the change value of the light intensity exceeds the preset value, the light intensity of the environment where the mobile phone is located has undergone a preset change. That is to say, if the light intensity of the environment where the mobile phone is located changes from the first intensity value to the second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds the preset value, it can be preliminarily determined that the user exists. The need to switch sound modes.
  • the reduction value of the light intensity exceeds a preset value, the user may come from a brighter outdoor environment to a darker indoor environment. Generally speaking, it is noisy outdoors and quiet indoors. In this case, there may be a need to switch from ring mode to silent mode or vibration mode.
  • the foregoing light intensity may be collected by an ambient light sensor in the mobile phone.
  • the ambient light sensor sends the collected light intensity to the processor.
  • the processor calculates the absolute value of the difference between the light intensities collected by two nearest neighbors. If the absolute value exceeds the preset value, the change value of the light intensity exceeds the preset value. On the contrary, if the absolute value does not exceed the preset value, then the change value of the light intensity does not exceed the preset value.
  • the preset environmental parameters include Wi-Fi connection conditions.
  • the mobile phone can monitor whether the mobile phone is automatically disconnected from the first Wi-Fi and/or automatically establishes a connection with the second Wi-Fi within a preset time 1.
  • the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi may be any Wi-Fi. If the mobile phone automatically disconnects from the first Wi-Fi and/or automatically establishes a connection with the second Wi-Fi within the preset time 1, the Wi-Fi connection situation of the environment where the mobile phone is located has undergone a preset change.
  • the mobile phone changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the mobile phone changes from being disconnected from the second Wi-Fi to being connected to the second Wi-Fi , it can be preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode.
  • the mobile phone is automatically disconnected from a certain Wi-Fi within the preset time 1
  • the user may come from an indoor environment to an outdoor environment.
  • the Wi-Fi connection status of the environment where the mobile phone is located has not changed by default. There is usually no need to switch sound modes at this point.
  • the preset environment parameters include a Wi-Fi list.
  • the Wi-Fi list scanned by the mobile phone changes, that is, when there is at least one different Wi-Fi
  • the Wi-Fi list of the environment where the mobile phone is located has undergone a preset change. That is to say, the Wi-Fi list scanned by the mobile phone changes from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and there is at least one different Wi-Fi in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list, Then it can be preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode.
  • the preset environmental parameters of the environment where the mobile phone is located are used to monitor whether there is a demand for switching sound modes. In practice, if the mobile phone is in silent mode or vibrating mode, the phone may be missed. In this case, there may be a need to switch the sound mode to the ring mode.
  • the mobile phone may monitor whether there may be a need to switch sound modes through S401 .
  • S401 The mobile phone monitors whether there is a missed call. If yes, execute S302; if not, continue to execute S401.
  • S302 is executed to further collect information (such as state information and environment information) to identify the user's switching intention. On the contrary, when it is detected that there is no missed call, then continue to execute S401 to continue monitoring.
  • the missed call is a call not answered by the user.
  • a missed call is a call that the user does not answer within a preset time interval.
  • the preset time interval refers to a time interval except the user's rest time.
  • the preset time interval is 8:00-22:00, or, the preset time is 8:00-13:00 and 14:00-22:00.
  • it if it is detected that there are unanswered calls within the preset time interval, it can be preliminarily determined that the user has a need to switch voice modes; In the case of a phone, there is no need to switch sound modes. Under normal circumstances, the user may switch the mobile phone to silent mode during the rest period (that is, within the non-preset time interval). It is normal for the user to miss the call. It cannot be considered as a missed connection by the user. It can be seen that, by using this embodiment, only calls not answered within the preset time interval are considered as missed calls, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
  • a missed call is a call that the user does not answer within the preset time 2 (also referred to as the first preset time).
  • the preset time 2 is a period of time that is relatively close to the current time.
  • the preset time 2 is the latest 1 hour, half an hour, 5 minutes and so on.
  • it if it is detected that there is an unanswered call within the preset time 2, it can be preliminarily determined that the user has a need to switch the sound mode; In the case of a phone, there is no need to switch the sound mode.
  • calls that are not answered for a long time from the current time are difficult to characterize the current handoff needs. It can be seen that, by adopting this embodiment, only calls not answered within the preset time 2 are regarded as missed calls, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
  • the missed call is a preset call not answered by the user, wherein the preset call is a call other than harassing calls and/or blacklisted calls.
  • the mobile phone can further monitor whether the phone 1 is a preset call. Specifically, the mobile phone can monitor whether the phone 1 is a harassing call, if the phone 1 is a harassing call, then the phone 1 is not the preset call; if the phone 1 is not a harassing call, then the phone 1 is the default call.
  • the harassing call refers to a phone marked with a harassing logo.
  • the mobile phone can match the phone 1 with the phone in the blacklist, if the phone 1 is included in the number of the blacklist, then the phone 1 is not a preset phone; if the phone 1 is not included in the blacklist , then phone 1 is the default phone. That is to say, the missed calls do not include the calls marked as harassment and/or the calls in the blacklist. And, when it is detected that the phone 1 is a default phone, it can be preliminarily determined that the user has a need to switch voice modes; when it is detected that the phone 1 is not a default phone, there is no need to switch voice modes .
  • the calls in the blacklist will be automatically blocked, and the calls in the blacklist are calls that the user is unwilling to answer; and harassing calls are also calls that the user is unwilling to answer. Therefore, for harassing calls and/or calls in the blacklist, if the user does not answer, it does not mean that the call is missed. It can be seen that, by adopting this embodiment, only the preset calls not answered by the user are regarded as missed calls, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
  • the handset can monitor whether there are more than a preset number of missed calls.
  • the preset quantity 1 is 5 times, 3 times and so on. If there are more than a preset number of missed calls, it is more likely that the missed calls were caused by not switching the sound mode in time. In this case, it is more likely that there is a need to switch the sound mode. If there are no missed calls exceeding the preset number 1, the missed calls may be caused by other reasons. For example, it is not convenient to answer the phone in a meeting. In this case, there is usually no need to switch sound modes. It can be seen that, in this embodiment, only when the number of missed calls exceeds the preset number, it is considered that there is a switching requirement, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
  • the preset environmental parameters of the environment where the mobile phone is located and the missed calls have been used to illustrate the specific implementation of monitoring whether there is a need to switch sound modes.
  • the above two methods can also be combined, and the combination method is specifically as follows: within the time period 1 when the solution of this application is started, the method of S401 is used to monitor whether the user has a need to switch the sound mode, so as to realize In the case of a missed call, further identify the switching intention, push the switching prompt and obtain the user's operation on the switching prompt.
  • the mobile phone can learn the features (for example, status, environment, etc.) and real needs of the missed call.
  • the method of S301 can be used to monitor whether the user has the need to switch the voice mode, so that the switching intention can be identified before the missed call occurs and the switching prompt can be pushed in time to avoid the missed call.
  • the mobile phone may also periodically or periodically execute the following S302 without triggering through S301 or S401.
  • the mobile phone acquires status information and environment information.
  • the state information includes the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone, and the environment information includes the environment sound.
  • the state information and environment information are acquired only after it is preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode, so as to further identify the switching intention. In this way, the power consumption of the mobile phone can be greatly reduced.
  • the status information is used to indicate the status of the mobile phone's current sound mode, usage and/or connection with other devices.
  • the status information includes the sound mode 1 currently used by the mobile phone. If the sound mode 1 is different, there may be different switching intentions. For example, if the sound mode 1 is a silent mode, there may be a switching intention to switch to the ringing mode (denoted as switching intention 1). For another example, if the sound mode 1 is a ring mode, there may be a switching intention to switch to a silent mode or a vibration mode.
  • the status information may include indication information (also referred to as first indication information) whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device.
  • the wearable device may be at least one of smart watches, bracelets, earphones, smart glasses and other devices.
  • the mobile phone can query the Bluetooth peripherals connected to the mobile phone. If the Bluetooth peripherals include the above-mentioned wearable devices (smart watch, bracelet and/or wireless earphone), it can sense that the mobile phone is connected to the above-mentioned wearable device.
  • the mobile phone can also sense whether the mobile phone is connected to a wired earphone by detecting the earphone jack of the mobile phone (such as the earphone jack 270D in FIG. 2 ). For example, if the earphone interface has audio input or output, the mobile phone is connected with a wired earphone.
  • the status information also includes indication information (also referred to as second indication information) whether the above-mentioned wearable device is worn on the user.
  • the mobile phone can detect whether the smart watch and/or wristband have collected the user's physiological characteristics, such as heart rate and blood pressure. If the smart watch and/or bracelet can collect the physiological characteristics of the user, it is perceived that the smart watch and/or bracelet are worn on the user.
  • the phone can also detect whether the wireless headset is worn in the ear. If it is detected that the wireless headset is worn in the ear, it is sensed that the wireless headset is worn on the user.
  • the status information includes indication information (also referred to as third indication information) whether the user is using the mobile phone. Wherein, whether the user is using the mobile phone can also be understood as whether the mobile phone is in use.
  • the mobile phone can detect whether the user is looking at the screen of the mobile phone.
  • gaze perception technology can be used to detect whether the user is looking at the screen of the mobile phone. Gaze perception technology uses the front camera to track the direction of the pupils to detect whether the user is looking at the phone screen. If it is detected that the user is looking at the screen of the mobile phone, it is equivalent to sensing that the user is using the mobile phone. That is, the user is using the mobile phone, including: the mobile phone detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone can detect whether a user's touch operation on the mobile phone screen is received within a preset time 3.
  • the preset time 3 may be 1 minute, 30 seconds, 5 seconds and so on. If it is detected that the user's touch operation on the mobile phone screen is received within the preset time 3, it is equivalent to sensing that the user is using the mobile phone. That is to say, the user is using the mobile phone, including: the mobile phone detects the user's touch operation on the screen of the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone may detect whether the user is using the mobile phone according to ambient light and/or acceleration. Specifically, the mobile phone can detect the light intensity of the ambient light through the ambient light sensor, and the mobile phone can detect the acceleration of the mobile phone through the acceleration sensor. If the light intensity is lower than the intensity value 1 (also referred to as the first preset intensity), it is perceived that the mobile phone is placed in a darker location such as the user's carry-on bag or clothes pocket, but not in the hand. Or, if the acceleration is greater than the preset acceleration 1 (also referred to as the preset acceleration), it is perceived that the mobile phone may move with the user walking or running, and the mobile phone is usually not used at this time. That is to say, the user is using the mobile phone, including: the mobile phone detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the mobile phone is less than the preset acceleration.
  • the intensity value 1 also referred to as the first preset intensity
  • the situation that the user is using the mobile phone in the above specific implementation manners is exemplary, and in actual implementation, multiple methods may be combined, or other situations may also be included.
  • the fact that the user is using a mobile phone may also include that the mobile phone is in a bright screen state.
  • the environment information is used to indicate the environment of the mobile phone, for example, the environment sound and/or the environment location.
  • the ambient information includes ambient sounds.
  • the mobile phone can turn on a microphone (such as the microphone 270C in FIG. 2 ) to collect the ambient sound of the environment where the mobile phone is currently located.
  • a microphone such as the microphone 270C in FIG. 2
  • the process of collecting ambient sound consumes a lot of power. If the ambient volume is collected for a long time, it will cause problems such as heating of the mobile phone and poor battery life.
  • the microphone is turned on to collect ambient sound only when it is detected that the user may have a need to switch the sound mode. For example, the microphone acquisition is not turned on until a large change in light intensity is detected. For another example, the microphone acquisition is started only after a missed call is detected. In this way, the power consumption of the mobile phone can be greatly reduced. Thereby realizing low-power sound collection.
  • the collected ambient sound may be stored in a trusted execution environment (Trusted Execution Environment, TEE).
  • TEE represents an area isolated from other modules in a System on Chip (SoC). Ordinary applications (except trusted applications) cannot obtain data from this zone. In this way, storing the ambient sound in the TEE can avoid the loss of the user's private data. This ensures the security of user privacy data.
  • the ambient sound collected multiple times can also be stored, which can more clearly reflect changes in the ambient sound of the environment where the mobile phone is located. This facilitates subsequent recognition of the handover intention.
  • the environment information includes the environment location (also called environment type) where the mobile phone is located.
  • the mobile phone can identify the current environment where the mobile phone is located.
  • the environmental place may be a conference room, an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a carriage, a roadside, a plaza, a movie theater, an amusement park, and a shopping mall.
  • the mobile phone can use an artificial intelligence (Artificial Intelligence, AI) recognition model (such as a low-power visual perception model) to identify the current environment where the mobile phone is located.
  • AI Artificial Intelligence
  • the AI identification model has the function of identifying the current environmental location of the mobile phone according to the environmental sound and/or environmental image.
  • the ambient sound of the environment where the mobile phone is located in history and/or the unprocessed image (RAW image) collected by the camera can be used as an input sample, and the marked environmental place can be used as an output sample.
  • RAW image unprocessed image
  • an AI recognition model can be trained.
  • the recognition process the currently collected ambient sound and/or RAW image can be input to the AI recognition model, and the AI recognition model can recognize the current environmental location of the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone detects whether the state information and the environment information satisfy preset condition 1. If yes, execute S304; if not, execute S301 or S401 repeatedly.
  • the preset condition 1 may also be referred to as the first preset condition.
  • the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, it indicates that the condition for switching from the silent mode or the vibration mode to the ringing mode is met. In this case, there is a switching intention (that is, switching intention 1) to switch from the silent mode or the vibrating mode to the ringing mode.
  • switching intention 1 that is, switching intention 1
  • the mobile phone detects that the status information and environment information do not meet the preset condition 1, it indicates that the condition for switching from the silent mode or the vibration mode to the ring mode is not met. In this case, handover intent 1 does not exist.
  • the first aspect is for the detection of state information.
  • the status information includes the sound mode 1 currently used by the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone can detect whether the sound mode 1 is a vibration mode or a silent mode. If the sound mode 1 is a vibration mode or a silent mode, the state information satisfies the preset condition 1, and there is a switch intention 1 at this time. On the contrary, if the sound mode 1 is a ringing mode, the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 1, and there is no switching intention 1 at this time. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that the situation of not switching to the ring mode in time is the situation of switching intention 1. That is to say, the premise of scenario 1 should be that the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone is silent mode or vibration mode. When the sound mode is a silent mode or a vibration mode, it is necessary to further detect other status information and environmental information.
  • the state information includes indication information whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device.
  • the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 1
  • the status information does not satisfy the preset condition 1.
  • the indication information 1 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is connected with a wearable device, the mobile phone can use the wearable device to prompt incoming calls or notification messages. Therefore, there is no need to prompt by ringing the bell, and there is no switching intention 1 at this time. Conversely, if the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 2, the state information satisfies the preset condition 1.
  • the indication information 2 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device, it is usually necessary to ring the mobile phone to prompt the incoming call or notification message, etc. At this time, there is switching intention 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that there is a switching intention 1 when there is an incoming call or a notification message that cannot be prompted by the wearable device.
  • the status information includes information indicating whether the wearable device is worn by the user.
  • the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 3, the status information does not satisfy the preset condition 1.
  • the indication information 3 is used to indicate that the wearable device is worn on the user. If the wearable device is worn on the user, the user can easily view the prompt of the incoming call or notification message from the wearable device. Therefore, there is no need to prompt by ringing the mobile phone, and there is no switching intention 1 at this time.
  • the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 4, the state information satisfies the preset condition 1.
  • the indication information 4 is used to indicate that the wearable device is not worn on the user. If the wearable device is not worn by the user, the user may not be able to view it even if the wearable device prompts an incoming call or notification message, and thus needs to be prompted by ringing the bell. At this time, there is switching intention 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the fact that the user cannot obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages through other means as the fact that there is a handover intention 1 .
  • the status information includes an indication of whether the user is using the cell phone.
  • the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is indication information 5, the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 1.
  • the indication information 5 is used to indicate that the user is using the mobile phone.
  • the user if the user is using a mobile phone, it will switch in time when the user needs to switch the sound mode. For example, if the user wants to switch to the ring mode, he will operate the switch in time on the mobile phone. Usually, there will be no situation where there is a switch intention 1 but the switch is not made.
  • the user can find prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages in time, and there is no need to prompt by ringing.
  • the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is the indication information 6, then the state information satisfies the preset condition 1.
  • the indication information 6 is used to indicate that the user is not using the mobile phone. If the user is not using the mobile phone, it may not be able to switch to the ring mode in time, and there may be a switching intention 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the situation that the user cannot switch to the ring mode in time as the situation that switching intention 1 exists.
  • the second aspect is for the detection of environmental information.
  • the environmental information includes environmental sounds of the environment where the mobile phone is located.
  • the environmental sound is the latest collected environmental sound, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (denoted as environmental sound 1).
  • the mobile phone can acquire the environmental sound 1 (for example, from the TEE), and detect whether the environmental sound 1 exceeds a preset decibel value 1 (also referred to as the first decibel). If the detected environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1.
  • the preset decibel value 1 may be greater than or equal to 60 decibels.
  • the preset decibel value 1 is 60 decibels, 80 decibels, etc. If the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, the user may not be able to feel the vibration of the mobile phone, or may not pay attention to the incoming call reminder (such as a bright screen reminder) due to the noisy environment. In this case, Handover Intent 1 may exist. On the contrary, if the detected environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 1 . If the ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, the environment is relatively quiet, and the ringing of the mobile phone may affect the surrounding people. In this case, handover intent 1 usually does not exist. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the noisy environment as the handover intention 1 .
  • the environmental sound may be at least two recently collected environmental sounds, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (environmental sound 1) and at least one environmental sound of the historical environment (marked as environmental sound 2).
  • the mobile phone can obtain the environmental sound 1 and the environmental sound 2 (such as obtained from TEE), and detect whether the environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, and detect whether the environmental sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 2.
  • the preset decibel value 2 is less than or equal to the preset decibel value 1 .
  • the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 .
  • the ambient sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, indicating that the historical environment is a relatively quiet environment
  • the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, indicating that the current environment is a relatively noisy environment. That is, the phone moves from a quiet environment to a noisy environment. In this case, it is very likely that the user did not switch the sound mode in time, which may result in missed calls, and there is switching intention 1 at this time.
  • the preset decibel value 2 is smaller than the preset decibel value 1, which can avoid the recognition error of the switching intention caused by the collection error of the ambient sound. For example, if the preset decibel value 1 is equal to 70 decibels, and the preset decibel value 2 is equal to 50 decibels, then only when the environmental cause 1 is at least 20 decibels higher than the environmental sound 2, the switching intention 1 will be recognized.
  • the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 .
  • the maximum value of the first volume range is smaller than the minimum value of the second volume range.
  • the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1.
  • the ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, and/or the ambient sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, indicating that the mobile phone has not moved from a quiet environment to a noisy environment. In this case, handover intent 1 usually does not exist.
  • the preset decibel value 1 is equal to the preset decibel value 2. If the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, and the ambient sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, it indicates that the mobile phone is always in a noisy environment. In this case, if the user has switching intention 1, the switching should have already been completed. Based on this, in this embodiment, this situation is recognized as the situation that there is no handover intention 1 .
  • the situation where the environment of the mobile phone changes from quiet to noisy can be identified as the situation that there is a handover intention 1 .
  • the environmental information includes the environmental location where the mobile phone is located.
  • the environmental location is the latest recognized environmental location, that is, the current environmental location (denoted as environmental location 1).
  • the mobile phone can acquire the environmental place 1, and detect whether the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place (also called a preset type).
  • the preset environmental place may be a noisy environment place such as a roadside, a carriage, or a square. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 .
  • the user may not be able to feel the vibration due to noise, or may not be able to pay attention to the incoming call reminder.
  • the user may have switching intention 1.
  • the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place (also called a non-preset type)
  • the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 1 .
  • handover intent 1 usually does not exist.
  • the characteristics of the environmental place are usually very obvious, and the necessity of using the ring reminder for different characteristics is also very clear.
  • vehicles and passers-by on the side of the road are noisy, and it is very easy to miss calls.
  • the roadside is a relatively open environment, and the ringing of the bell is not easy to cause disturbance to the surrounding people. Therefore, it is necessary and possible to use the ringing reminder.
  • the noise on the plane is also very loud.
  • the phone cannot be answered on the plane, and it does not make sense to turn on the ring mode. This eliminates the need for a ringing alert.
  • the situation on the airplane may be recognized as the situation of switching intention 1, which is obviously unreasonable.
  • the situation that the environmental place is an airplane can be identified as the situation that there is no switching intention 1 .
  • the environmental location may be the environmental location identified at least twice recently, that is, the current environmental location (environmental location 1) and at least one historical location (environmental location 2).
  • the mobile phone can obtain the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2, and detect whether the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2 are preset environmental places. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place and the environmental place 2 is not a preset environmental place, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 .
  • Environmental location 2 is not a preset environmental location, indicating that the historical environmental location is an environmental location that does not need to use a bell reminder, and environmental location 2 is a default environmental location, indicating that the current environmental location is an environmental location that requires a ringing reminder.
  • the mobile phone has moved from an environmental place that does not need a ringing reminder to an environmental place that requires a ringing reminder.
  • the user may have switching intention 1. That is to say, if the environmental place changes from a non-preset type to a preset type, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1.
  • the preset type may be places with relatively loud noises such as restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds, or shopping malls.
  • the mobile phone does not move from an environmental place that does not require a ringing reminder to an environmental place that requires a ringing reminder, and there is usually no switching intention 1 .
  • the mobile phone can recognize that there is a handover intention 1 when the mobile phone is moved from an environmental place that does not require a ringing reminder to an environmental place that requires a ringing reminder. Therefore, the rationality of the recognition result can be improved.
  • the mobile phone may identify the handover intention 1 by combining at least one state information and at least one environment information, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • at least one kind of status information includes sound mode 1
  • at least one kind of environmental information includes environmental sound 1 and environmental sound 2 .
  • Example 1 if the mobile phone detects that the sound mode 1 is silent mode or vibration mode, and the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, and the ambient sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, then the status information and environmental information meet the preset conditions 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the situation that the ring mode is not currently used and the mobile phone moves from a quiet environment to a noisy environment as the situation of switching intention 1 .
  • Example 2 when each item of state information and environment information conforms to the conditions shown in Table 1 below, it can be recognized that there is a handover intention 1 .
  • the handover intention 1 can be identified only when the above-listed items of status information and items of environmental information all indicate that the handover intention 1 exists, that is, only when the handover intention 1 is very strong.
  • S304 is executed to prompt the user to switch the ringing mode. If it is detected that the state information and the environment information do not meet the preset condition 1, S301 or S401 is repeatedly executed to continue monitoring whether there may be a switching requirement.
  • the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 1.
  • the switching prompt 1 is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ringing mode.
  • the switching prompt 1 may also be referred to as first prompt information.
  • the mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 .
  • the lock screen interface 501 includes a switching prompt 502, and the switching prompt 502 is used to prompt switching to the ringing mode.
  • the switching prompt 1 includes prompt text, pictures or videos.
  • the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 includes the prompt text "whether to adjust to the ringing mode".
  • the switching prompt 1 further includes a control 1, and the control 1 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the ringing mode.
  • the control 1 is the "OK" button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 .
  • the switching prompt 1 further includes a control 2, and the control 2 is used to trigger the mobile phone to cancel the prompt.
  • the control 2 is the "Cancel" button 504 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 .
  • the mobile phone can also display a reminder of missed calls on the lock screen interface.
  • the prompt of the missed call is used to remind the user that there is a missed call.
  • the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 includes a reminder 505 of a missed call.
  • the display of switching prompt 1 in the previous article is based on the display on the lock screen interface as an example.
  • the lock screen interface includes the interface before unlocking after the phone is turned on, and the lock screen interface usually includes an unlocked logo at this time.
  • the lock screen interface may be the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the closed lock 507 and the text prompt "slide to unlock" 508 may indicate that it has not been unlocked.
  • the lock screen interface may also include an interface where the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the main interface or the application interface is not entered after face unlocking. At this time, the lock screen interface usually includes an indication of successful unlocking.
  • the lock screen interface may be the lock screen interface 509 shown in (b) of FIG. 5 , and the lock screen interface 509 includes an indication 510 of successful unlocking.
  • the lock screen interface is the interface before unlocking after the screen of the mobile phone is turned on.
  • the switching prompt 1 can be displayed in the top n positions.
  • n is an integer.
  • the method of displaying on the lock screen is mainly applicable to the following two situations: Situation 1, when the mobile phone detects that the status information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1, and the mobile phone is in the lock screen interface, it can display and switch on the lock screen interface. Tip 1.
  • Situation 1 when the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in a screen-off state. After the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the lock screen interface is displayed, switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the lock screen interface.
  • the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in the off-screen state shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) in FIG.
  • the mobile phone can timely display the switching prompt 1 to the user through the lock screen interface.
  • it is not limited to displaying the switching prompt 1 through the lock screen interface.
  • the switching prompt 1 can also be displayed on the main interface of the mobile phone.
  • Case 1 when the mobile phone detects that the status information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1, if the mobile phone is currently displaying the main interface, a switching prompt 1 can be displayed on the main interface.
  • the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1 the mobile phone is in a screen-off state. After the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the main interface is directly displayed, switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the main interface. For example, when the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in the off-screen state shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the mobile phone may directly display the main interface 701 shown in (a) of FIG. 7 in response to the user's finger pressing operation on the fingerprint collection area on the back of the mobile phone.
  • the main interface 701 includes a switching prompt 702 . In this way, the mobile phone can timely display the switching prompt 1 to the user through the main interface.
  • the switching prompt 1 may also be displayed in the application interface.
  • Case 1 when the mobile phone detects that the status information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1, if the mobile phone is currently displaying an application interface, a switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the application interface.
  • Case 2 When the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in a screen-off state, and the mobile phone displays an application interface before the screen is off. After the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the application interface is directly displayed, a switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the application interface. For example, when it is detected that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in the off-screen state shown in FIG.
  • the mobile phone displays the application interface of the video application before the screen is off.
  • the mobile phone can directly display the application interface 703 shown in (b) of FIG. 7 in response to the user's finger pressing operation on the fingerprint collection area on the back of the mobile phone.
  • the application interface 703 includes content of the video application and a switching prompt 1704 . In this way, the mobile phone can timely display the switching prompt 1 to the user through the application interface.
  • the difference from displaying the switching prompt 1 on the lock screen interface is that when the switching prompt 1 is displayed on the main interface or the application interface, in order to avoid affecting the user's use of the mobile phone, the switching prompt 1 is usually not displayed for a long time. In this case, the user may miss switching prompt 1.
  • the mobile phone currently displays the main interface or the application interface, but the user may not be using the mobile phone, such as placing the mobile phone on a table.
  • the mobile phone before the mobile phone displays the switching prompt 1 on the main interface or the application interface, the mobile phone can detect whether the user is using the mobile phone. Furthermore, in order to ensure that the user's eyes can pay attention to the switching prompt 1, the mobile phone can detect whether the user's eyes are looking at the mobile phone screen through gaze sensing technology. If the user's eyes are looking at the screen of the mobile phone, it means that the mobile phone is being used. Correspondingly, if it is detected that the user is using the mobile phone, the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 1 on the main interface or the application interface. In this way, it can be ensured that the user can view the switching prompt 1 .
  • the mobile phone switches the sound mode to the ringing mode in response to the user's operation 1 on the switching prompt 1.
  • operation 1 may also be referred to as a first operation.
  • the mobile phone may receive the user's operation 1 on the switching prompt 1.
  • operation 1 may be a click operation or a long press operation of the user on the switching prompt.
  • the operation 1 may also be a preset gesture 1 (such as a " ⁇ " gesture). In the following embodiments, it will be mainly described by taking that operation 1 is the user's click operation on the control 1 in the switching prompt 1 as an example.
  • the control 1 is the "confirm” button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 as an example.
  • the mobile phone may receive the user's click operation on the "Confirm” button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 .
  • the mobile phone may display the unlocking interface 801 shown in (a) of FIG. 8 .
  • the mobile phone can display the main interface 802 shown in (b) in Figure 8, and what is displayed in the status bar of the main interface 802 is the icon of the ringing mode 803. That is to say, the mobile phone can switch the sound mode from the silent mode to the ringing mode in response to the user's click operation and unlock operation on the control 1 .
  • the lock screen interface is the interface before unlocking after the phone is turned on, the user needs to perform operation 1 to further unlock the phone to trigger the phone to switch the sound mode.
  • the switch can only be performed after identity recognition, which can prevent the non-owner from operating the mobile phone and triggering the switch of the sound mode.
  • the switching prompt 1 shows an interface that does not enter the main interface or application interface after face unlocking (such as the lock screen interface 509 shown in (b) in Figure 5), the main interface (such as the one in Figure 7 The main interface 701 shown in (a)), the application interface (such as the application interface 703 shown in (b) in Figure 7), then the mobile phone can directly switch the sound mode in response to the user's operation 1 of the switching prompt 1 It is the ring mode, and the switching prompt 1 can be turned off.
  • the main interface such as the one in Figure 7
  • the application interface such as the application interface 703 shown in (b) in Figure 7
  • the mobile phone switches to the ringing mode only in response to operation 1. In this way, the mobile phone can switch the sound mode based on the user's will, which can make up for the defect of inaccurate recognition results.
  • the mobile phone closes the switching prompt 1 in response to the preset event 1. Among them, the sound mode of the mobile phone remains unchanged.
  • the preset event 1 may be the user's operation 2 on the switching prompt 1 .
  • the operation 2 may be a click operation or a long press operation or the like.
  • the operation 2 may also be a preset gesture 2 (such as a left swipe gesture, an up swipe gesture, etc.). In the following embodiments, it will be mainly described by taking operation 2 as an example of clicking the control 2 in the switching prompt 1.
  • the control 1 is the "confirm" button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 as an example.
  • the mobile phone may receive the user's click operation on the "Confirm” button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 .
  • the mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 901 shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the status bar of the lock screen interface 901 displays the mute mode icon 902
  • the status bar of the lock screen interface 501 also displays the mute mode icon 506 . That said, the sound mode remains the same.
  • what is different from the lock screen interface 501 is that the lock screen interface 901 does not include the switching prompt 1 . That is to say, the mobile phone has turned off the display of switching prompt 1.
  • the preset event 1 may be an event that the display duration of the switching prompt 1 reaches the preset duration 1 .
  • the preset duration 1 is displayed in the case of no user operation.
  • the preset duration may be 3 seconds, 5 seconds or 10 seconds. Therefore, for this situation, when the display duration of the switching prompt 1 reaches the preset duration 1, the mobile phone closes the display of the switching prompt 1 and keeps the current sound mode unchanged.
  • the mobile phone After switching to the ring mode, that is, the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone is adjusted to the ring mode, and the mobile phone uses the ring mode to complete the incoming call prompt or notification message prompt, so that the user can answer the incoming call or receive the notification message in time.
  • the mobile phone can identify whether the user has switching intention 1 when detecting that there may be a need to switch the voice mode. Therefore, targeted identification can be performed, which is beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the mobile phone. Furthermore, the mobile phone identifies whether there is a switching intention 1 according to the state information and the environment, which can improve the accuracy of the identification result. When it is recognized that there is a switching intention 1, the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 1 on the lock screen interface or the main interface to prompt the user to switch to the ringing mode; and the user operates the switching prompting 1 to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the ringing mode. bell pattern. In this way, the mobile phone can provide a convenient switching entry for users with switching intention 1. This enables a quick switch to ring mode. After switching to the ring mode, the mobile phone can ring to prompt information such as incoming calls or notification messages, so as to prevent users from missing various information.
  • a switching prompt 1 is pushed to the user.
  • different users have different needs for switching prompts. For example, for users who do not switch sound modes on a daily basis, they have no need for switching prompts.
  • S1001 is also included.
  • the mobile phone detects whether the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2. If yes, execute S303; if not, execute S301 or S401.
  • the preset condition 2 may also be referred to as a second preset condition.
  • the user portrait may indicate the user's habit of switching voice modes.
  • the user portrait meets the preset condition 2, it indicates that the user has a high demand for the mobile phone to quickly switch to the ring mode by pushing the switching prompt 1, and this user is the target user of the push switching prompt 1.
  • the user portrait includes the number of times 1 (also referred to as the first number) that the mobile phone switches the sound mode in response to the user's operation within the second preset time period, wherein the second preset time period refers to A preset time before the current time. For example, the second preset time is the last month, half a year and so on. In this way, the timeliness of the number 1 is guaranteed. If the number of times 1 exceeds the preset number of times 1 (also referred to as the first preset number of times), the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2 . Wherein, the number of times 1 exceeds the preset number of times 1, indicating that the user will switch the sound mode more frequently, and the user is the target user.
  • the second preset time period refers to A preset time before the current time. For example, the second preset time is the last month, half a year and so on. In this way, the timeliness of the number 1 is guaranteed. If the number of times 1 exceeds the preset number of times 1 (also
  • the mobile phone can determine the user who frequently switches the sound mode as the target user to push the switching prompt.
  • the user portrait includes the voice mode adopted by the user under different environmental information (eg, environmental location, environmental sound). For example, the user adopts the ring mode in a noisy environment, and the user adopts the silent mode indoors.
  • environmental information eg, environmental location, environmental sound
  • the user portrait includes the number of times the mobile phone switches to the ring mode in response to the user's operation 2 (also referred to as third times).
  • the fourth preset time period refers to a preset time before the current time. For example, the fourth preset time is the last month, half a year and so on. In this way, the timeliness of times 2 is guaranteed. If the number of times 2 exceeds the preset number of times 2 (also referred to as the third preset number of times), it indicates that the user tends to use the ringing mode in a noisy environment, and the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2. In this case, the user is the target user.
  • the mobile phone can determine the user who tends to switch to the ring mode in a noisy environment as the target user to push the switching prompt 1 .
  • the mobile phone can trigger the mobile phone to collect the ambient sound of the environment after detecting the change of the sound mode. Then combined with the sound mode of the mobile phone at the current moment, the ambient sound when switching the sound mode can be determined. Moreover, the acquisition is triggered after the switching of the sound mode is detected, which can realize sound acquisition with low power consumption and reduce the power consumption of the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone can determine the user who uses the ring pattern in the preset location as the target user to push the switching prompt.
  • the user profile includes the number 4 (also referred to as the second number) of switching the sound mode of the mobile phone in response to the operation 1 within the third preset time period.
  • the third preset time period refers to a preset time before the current time.
  • the fourth preset time is the last month, half a year and so on. In this way, the timeliness of the number 4 is guaranteed.
  • the preset number of times 4 is related to the display times of the switching prompt 1. For example, the ratio of the preset number 4 to the displayed number is greater than 50%.
  • the mobile phone can further determine users who are more receptive to switching the sound mode by switching the prompt 1 as target users for subsequent pushing of the switching prompt 1 .
  • the user portrait may also include the voice mode adopted by the user in different time periods.
  • the user adopts a ring mode during working hours, and adopts a silent mode or a vibration mode during rest time.
  • the user portrait may also be the voice mode adopted by the user at different locations. For example, the user adopts ring mode at home and office, and adopts silent mode or vibrate mode in other places.
  • the dimensions detected when identifying the switching intention may also be different.
  • the user portrait used includes the voice mode adopted by the user in different time periods, then when the switch intention is recognized, it is also necessary to detect whether the current time is within the time period of adopting the corresponding voice mode.
  • S303 is executed to further identify the user's switching intention.
  • the switching prompt 1 is not displayed this time, and S301 or S401 and subsequent steps are continued. It should be noted that the user portrait will be updated continuously, and the preset condition 2 is not satisfied at present, and the preset condition 2 may be satisfied in the future. Therefore, when it is detected that the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 2, S301 or S401 is repeatedly executed.
  • S1001 is located between S302 and S303 for illustration. If S1001 is executed before S302, the switching intention of the user can be further identified only when the user is the target user. In this way, the mobile phone can be prevented from performing invalid calculations.
  • the step of identifying the target user in S1001 is before S304, it is not limited to the time sequence shown in FIG. 10 . And, if it is identified as the target user, then execute the next step, if it is identified as not the target user, then enter the next round of monitoring.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 may be used for implementation. And in the process, build user portraits. For example, count the number of times 4 according to the user's operation on the switching prompt. After a relatively complete user portrait is formed, the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 is used to implement the solution of this application, and the user portrait is continuously updated for subsequent use.
  • an initial user portrait can be set, and the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 is used to realize the solution of this application, and the user portrait is continuously updated for subsequent use.
  • the mobile phone can detect the user's demand for switching the voice mode by pushing the switching prompt according to the user portrait, so as to identify whether the user is the target user of the pushing switching prompt. Then, a switching prompt is pushed to the target user. In this way, targeted push can be realized, unnecessary push and subsequent processing can be avoided, and mobile phone calculations can be reduced. At the same time, interference to non-target users can also be reduced.
  • switching sound modes refers to switching from ring mode to vibration mode or silent mode, that is, mode 1 is vibration mode or silent mode.
  • the method includes S1101-S1107.
  • the mobile phone monitors whether a preset environmental parameter of the environment where the mobile phone is located undergoes a preset change. If yes, execute S1102; if not, continue to execute S1101.
  • the preset environment parameter may also be referred to as a first environment parameter.
  • the mobile phone may also periodically or periodically execute the following S1102 without triggering S1101.
  • the mobile phone acquires status information and environment information.
  • the state information includes the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone, and the environment information includes the environment sound.
  • the mobile phone detects whether the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 3. If yes, execute S1104; if not, execute S1101 repeatedly.
  • preset condition 3 may also be called a first preset condition.
  • the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 3, it indicates that the condition for switching from ring mode to silent mode or vibration mode is met. In this case, there is a switching intention (that is, switching intention 2) from the ringing mode to the silent mode or the vibrating mode. On the contrary, if the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information do not meet the preset condition 3, it indicates that the condition for switching from the ring mode to the silent mode or the vibration mode is not met. In this case there is no handover intent 2.
  • the first aspect is for the detection of state information.
  • the status information includes the sound mode 1 currently used by the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone can detect whether the sound pattern 1 is a ringing pattern. If the sound mode 1 is a ringing mode, the state information satisfies the preset condition 3, and there is a switch intention 2 at this time. On the contrary, if the sound mode 1 is a silent mode or a vibration mode, and the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 3, then there is no switching intention 2 at this time. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that the situation of not switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode in time is the situation of switching intention 2 . That is to say, the premise of scenario 2 should be that the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone is the ringing mode. When the sound mode is the ring mode, it is necessary to further detect other state information and environment information.
  • the state information includes indication information whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device.
  • the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 1
  • the state information satisfies the preset condition 3.
  • the indication information 1 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is connected with a wearable device, the mobile phone can use the wearable device to prompt incoming calls or notification messages. Therefore, there is no need to remind by ringing the bell. At this time, it is necessary to switch to silent mode or vibration mode, so there is switching intention 2.
  • the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 2, the status information does not satisfy the preset condition 3.
  • the indication information 2 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device, the mobile phone usually needs to ring to prompt incoming calls or notification messages, etc. At this time, it cannot switch to silent mode or vibration mode, so there is no switching intention 2. In this way, the mobile phone can identify situations that can be promptly prompted by the wearable device, such as an incoming call or a notification message, as a situation where there is a handover intention 2 .
  • the status information includes information indicating whether the wearable device is worn by the user.
  • the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 3, the state information satisfies the preset condition 3.
  • the indication information 3 is used to indicate that the wearable device is worn on the user. If the wearable device is worn on the user, the user can easily view the prompt of the incoming call or notification message from the wearable device. Therefore, there is no need to prompt by ringing the mobile phone. At this time, the user can switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode, so that there is switching intention 2. On the contrary, if the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 4, the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 3.
  • the indication information 4 is used to indicate that the wearable device is not worn on the user. If the wearable device is not worn on the user's body, the user may not be able to view it even if the wearable device prompts an incoming call or notification message, etc., and thus needs to be prompted by ringing, and cannot switch to silent mode or vibrate at this time mode, so that there is no switch intent 2. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the situation that the user can obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages through other channels as the situation of switching intention 2 .
  • the status information includes an indication of whether the user is using the cell phone.
  • the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is indication information 5, the state information satisfies the preset condition 3.
  • the indication information 5 is used to indicate that the user is using the mobile phone. If the user is using the mobile phone, he can obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages in time, and can switch to silent mode or vibration mode at this time, so there is switching intention 2.
  • the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is the indication information 6, then the state information satisfies the preset condition 3. Wherein, the indication information 6 is used to indicate that the user is not using the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone can recognize the fact that the user can conveniently obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages as the fact that there is a handover intention 2 .
  • the second aspect is for the detection of environmental information.
  • the environmental information includes environmental sounds of the environment where the mobile phone is located.
  • the environmental sound is the latest collected environmental sound, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (denoted as environmental sound 1).
  • the mobile phone can obtain the ambient sound 1 (such as obtained from TEE), and detect whether the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2 (in scene 2, the preset decibel value 2 can also be called the first decibel) . If the detected environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 .
  • the preset decibel value 2 may be a value less than or equal to 60 decibels.
  • the preset decibel value 2 is 60dB, 40dB, etc. If the ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, the environment is relatively quiet, and the ringing of the mobile phone may affect the surrounding people. In this case, Handover Intent 2 may exist. On the contrary, if the detected environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 3 . If the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, the user may not be able to feel the vibration of the mobile phone, or may not pay attention to the incoming call reminder (such as a bright screen reminder) due to the noisy environment. In this case, handover intent 2 usually does not exist. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that the environment is quiet as the handover intention 2 exists.
  • the environmental sound may be at least two recently collected environmental sounds, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (environmental sound 1) and at least one environmental sound of the historical environment (marked as environmental sound 2).
  • the mobile phone can obtain the environmental sound 1 and the environmental sound 2 (for example, from TEE), and detect whether the environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, and detect whether the environmental sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 1.
  • the preset decibel value 2 is less than or equal to the preset decibel value 1 .
  • the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . If the ambient sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, it indicates that the historical environment is a relatively noisy environment; if the environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, it indicates that the current environment is a relatively quiet environment. That is, the phone moves from a noisy environment to a quiet one. In this case, it is very likely that the user will affect the surrounding people due to not switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode in time, and there is switching intention 2 at this time. Similarly, the preset decibel value 2 is smaller than the preset decibel value 1, which can avoid the recognition error of the switching intention caused by the collection error of the ambient sound.
  • the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 .
  • the maximum value of the first volume range is smaller than the minimum value of the second volume range.
  • the preset decibel value 1 is equal to the preset decibel value 2. If the ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, and the ambient sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, it means that the mobile phone is always in a quiet environment. In this case, if the user has switching intention 2, the switching should have already been completed. In this embodiment, this situation is identified as the situation that there is no handover intention 2 .
  • the situation where the environment of the mobile phone changes from noisy to quiet can be identified as the situation of switching intention 2 .
  • the environmental information includes the environmental location where the mobile phone is located.
  • the environmental location is the latest recognized environmental location, that is, the environmental location of the current environment (denoted as environmental location 1).
  • the mobile phone can obtain the environmental place 1, and detect whether the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place.
  • the preset environmental place may be a noisy environment place such as a roadside, a carriage, or a square. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . If the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place, it is usually necessary to use a silent mode or a vibration mode to avoid affecting people around. In this case, Handover Intent 2 exists.
  • the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place
  • the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 3 .
  • the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place, and if the silent mode or the vibration mode is used, the call is usually missed. In this case, handover intent 2 usually does not exist. Similar to Scenario 1, the presence of Switching Intent 2 can be accurately identified through the environment. For specific reasons, please refer to the relevant description in Scenario 1.
  • the environmental location may be the environmental location identified at least twice recently, that is, the current environmental location (environmental location 1) and at least one historical location (environmental location 2).
  • the mobile phone can obtain the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2, and detect whether the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2 are preset environmental places. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place and the environmental place 2 is a preset environmental place, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 .
  • Environmental location 2 is the default environmental location, indicating that the environmental location where the history is located is an environmental location that needs to use a ring reminder, and environmental location 1 is not a default environmental location, indicating that the current environmental location is an environmental location that does not need to use a ring reminder. That is to say, the mobile phone has moved from an environmental place where a ringing reminder is required to an environmental place where a ringing reminder is not required. In this case, Handover Intent 2 exists. That is to say, if the environmental place is changed from a preset type to a non-preset type, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 .
  • the preset type may be places with relatively loud noises such as restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds, or shopping malls.
  • the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 3 .
  • the mobile phone can recognize that there is a handover intention 2 when the mobile phone moves from an environmental place where a ringing reminder is required to an environmental place where a ringing reminder is not required. Therefore, the rationality of the recognition result can be improved.
  • the mobile phone may identify the switching intention 2 by combining at least one state information and at least one environmental information, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • at least one kind of status information includes sound mode 1
  • at least one kind of environmental information includes environmental sound 1 and environmental sound 2 .
  • the handover intention 2 may be identified only when the above-listed items of status information and items of environmental information all indicate that the handover intention 2 exists, that is, only when the handover intention 2 is very strong.
  • S1104 executes S1104 to prompt the user to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode. If it is detected that the state information and the environment information do not satisfy the preset condition 3, S1101 is repeatedly executed.
  • the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 2.
  • the switching prompt 2 is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
  • switching prompt 2 may also be referred to as first prompt information.
  • the mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 1201 shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the lock screen interface 1201 includes a switching prompt 1202, and the switching prompt 1202 is used to prompt switching to the mute mode.
  • switching prompt 2 is used to prompt switching to silent mode or vibration mode. That is, Mode 1 is a silent mode or a vibration mode.
  • the prompt text, picture or video in the switching prompt 2 is used to prompt switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
  • the switching prompt 2 includes a control 3, and the control 3 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
  • the control 3 is the "confirm" button 1203 in the switching prompt 1202 shown in FIG. 12, and the "confirm” button 1203 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the silent mode.
  • the switching prompt 2 may also include a control 4, which is used to trigger the mobile phone to cancel the prompt.
  • the control 4 is the "cancel” button 1204 in the switching prompt 1202 shown in FIG. 12, and the "confirm” button 1204 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the silent mode.
  • mode 1 may be determined according to the number of times the user uses the vibration mode or the number of times the silent mode is used. For example, if the usage times of the vibration mode is greater than or equal to the usage times of the silent mode, mode 1 is the vibration mode. If the number of times the vibration mode is used is less than the number of times the silent mode is used, the mode 1 is the silent mode. It should be noted that the combination of greater than and equal to is used as an example above. In fact, equal to may also be combined with less than, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. In this way, it is convenient and quick to switch to the mode you are used to.
  • Mode 1 may be determined according to Environmental Sound 1 .
  • the mode 1 is the silent mode. In this way, you can avoid disturbing the people around you in a very quiet environment.
  • the mode 1 is the vibration mode. Therefore, in a relatively quiet environment, it is possible to avoid disturbing people around as much as possible, and at the same time, it is possible to avoid missing information such as incoming calls or notification messages as much as possible.
  • the above is an example of a combination of greater than and equal to. In fact, equal to can also be combined with less than, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. In this way, it is convenient to switch to a mode that matches the ambient sound, and the switched mode takes into account the interference to others and the prompt to the user.
  • the switching prompt 2 may also be displayed on the lock screen interface, the main interface, and the like.
  • the switching prompt 2 is displayed in the previous main interface or the application interface, then when it is detected that the user is using the mobile phone (the user's eyes are watching the mobile phone screen), the mobile phone displays the switching prompt 2 in the main interface or the application interface.
  • the mobile phone switches the sound mode to a silent mode or a vibration mode in response to the user's operation 3 on the switching prompt 2.
  • operation 3 may also be referred to as the first operation.
  • control 3 is the "Confirm” button 1203 in the switching prompt 1202 shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the mobile phone may display the unlocking interface 1301 shown in (a) of FIG. 13 .
  • the mobile phone can display the main interface 1302 shown in (b) in FIG. . That is to say, the mobile phone can switch the sound mode from the ring mode to the silent mode or the vibration mode in response to the user's click operation and unlock operation on the control 3 .
  • the lock screen interface is the interface before unlocking after the phone is turned on, the user needs to perform operation 3 to further unlock the phone to trigger the phone to switch the sound mode.
  • the switch can only be performed after identity recognition, which can prevent the non-owner from operating the mobile phone and triggering the switch of the sound mode.
  • the mobile phone can respond to the user's operation 3 on the switching prompt 2, and can directly turn the sound
  • the mode is switched to silent mode or vibration mode, and the switching prompt 2 can be turned off.
  • the mobile phone closes the switching prompt 2 in response to the preset event 2. Among them, the sound mode of the mobile phone remains unchanged.
  • the mobile phone can identify whether the user has switching intention 2 when detecting that there may be a need to switch the sound mode. Therefore, targeted identification can be performed, which is beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the mobile phone. Further, the mobile phone identifies whether there is a switching intention 2 according to the status information and the environment, which can improve the accuracy of the identification result. When it is recognized that there is a switching intention 2, the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 2 on the lock screen interface or the main interface, etc., to prompt the user to switch to the silent mode or vibration mode; and, the user operates the switching prompt 2 to trigger the mobile phone to switch to silent mode or vibrate mode.
  • the mobile phone can provide a convenient switching entry for users with switching intention 2 . In this way, you can quickly switch to silent mode or vibration mode. After switching to silent mode or vibration mode, the mobile phone can mute or vibrate to prompt information such as incoming calls or notification messages to avoid disturbing people around.
  • preset condition 4 may also be called a second preset condition.
  • S1401 the electronic device needs to determine whether the user is the target user for pushing the switching prompt 2.
  • electronic devices can be identified by user portraits in the following dimensions:
  • the user profile includes the number 1 (also referred to as the first time number) of switching the sound mode of the mobile phone in response to the user's operation within the first preset time period. If the number of times 1 exceeds the preset number of times 1 (also referred to as the first preset number of times), the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 4 . On the contrary, if the number of times 1 does not exceed the preset number of times 1 (also referred to as the first preset number of times), the user profile does not satisfy the preset condition 4 . Regarding the dimension one, please refer to the relevant description in S1001.
  • the user portrait includes the number 5 times the mobile phone switches to silent mode or vibration mode in response to user operations when the ambient sound is less than the preset decibel value 2 within the fourth preset time period (also referred to as the first three times). If the number of times 5 exceeds the preset number of times 5 (also referred to as the third preset number of times), it indicates that the user tends to use the silent mode or the vibration mode in a quiet environment, and the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 4 . On the contrary, if the number of times 5 does not exceed the preset number of times 5, the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 4 .
  • the implementation principle of the second dimension is similar to the detection and determination process of the number of times 2 in S1001, and will not be repeated here.
  • the user portrait includes the number 6 (also referred to as the second number) of switching the sound mode of the mobile phone in response to the operation 3 within the third preset time period. If the number of times 6 exceeds the preset number of times 6 (also referred to as the second preset number of times), then the user has a higher acceptance of switching the voice mode through the switching prompt 2, and the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 4 at this time. On the contrary, if the number of times 6 does not exceed the preset number of times 6, the user profile does not meet the preset condition 4, and the user is not a target user.
  • the implementation principle of dimension three is similar to the detection and determination process of the number of times 4 in S1001, and will not be repeated here.
  • the mobile phone may preliminarily determine whether there may be a need to switch sound modes at present (such as S301 ). If it is preliminarily determined that there is a need to switch the sound mode, the mobile phone may obtain status information and environment information (eg S302). Then, the mobile phone can determine whether the user is the target user (for example, S1001 and S1401 can be used to determine simultaneously, corresponding to S1501 in FIG.
  • preset condition 5 includes preset condition 2 and preset condition 4).
  • the mobile phone can simultaneously (not shown in FIG. 15 ) or sequentially (shown in FIG. 15 is a sequential manner) check whether the state information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1 (such as S303), and detect the status information and whether the environment information satisfies the preset condition 2 (such as S1103). If it is detected that the preset condition 1 is met, a switching prompt 1 is displayed (eg S304); if it is detected that the preset condition 2 is met, a switching prompt 2 is displayed (eg S1104).
  • the mobile phone can switch the sound mode according to the user's operation on the switching prompt (such as switching prompt 1 or switching prompt 2). In this way, it is possible to flexibly and conveniently switch to the corresponding sound mode according to the switching intention of the user, instead of only switching to the ringing mode, or only switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
  • an electronic device which may include: the above-mentioned display screen (such as a touch screen), a memory, and one or more processors.
  • the display screen, memory and processor are coupled.
  • the memory is used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions.
  • the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the structure of the electronic device reference may be made to the structure of the mobile phone 200 shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the chip system 1600 includes at least one processor 1601 and at least one interface circuit 1602 .
  • the processor 1601 and the interface circuit 1602 may be interconnected through wires.
  • interface circuit 1602 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as memory of an electronic device.
  • the interface circuit 1602 may be used to send signals to other devices (such as the processor 1601).
  • the interface circuit 1602 can read instructions stored in the memory, and send the instructions to the processor 1601 .
  • the electronic device may be made to execute various steps in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform the various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiment .
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the method embodiment above.
  • the disclosed devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be Incorporation or may be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the unit described as a separate component may or may not be physically separated, and the component displayed as a unit may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, it may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places . Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the software product is stored in a storage medium Among them, several instructions are included to make a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes such as U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • Telephone Function (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of terminals. Provided are a method for switching a sound mode, and an electronic device, by means of which a switching prompt can be intelligently pushed to a user, thereby improving the efficiency of switching a ring mode. The method comprises: an electronic device acquiring a sound mode of the electronic device and the current scenario information of the electronic device, wherein the sound mode is a silent mode, a vibration mode or a ring mode, and the scenario information comprises ambient sound of the environment in which the electronic device is located; when the sound mode is the silent mode or the vibration mode, the electronic device displaying first prompt information if the scenario information meets a first preset condition, wherein the scenario information meeting the first preset condition comprises the ambient sound rising from a first volume range to a second volume range, and the first prompt information is used for requesting a user to confirm whether to switch to the ring mode; and in response to a first operation of the user for the first prompt information, the electronic device switching the sound mode to the ring mode.

Description

一种声音模式的切换方法及电子设备Method and electronic device for switching sound modes
本申请要求于2021年8月27日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202110998713.1、发明名称为“一种声音模式的切换方法及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on August 27, 2021, with application number 202110998713.1, and the title of the invention is "A Method for Switching Sound Modes and Electronic Equipment", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及终端技术领域，尤其涉及一种声音模式的切换方法及电子设备。The present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular to a voice mode switching method and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
手机、平板等电子设备中，通常提供响铃模式、震动模式以及静音模式共三种声音模式。采用响铃模式，可以避免漏接来电，但是响铃极有可能会干扰到周围的人。尤其在安静或者室内环境下，对周围人的干扰尤为突出。采用震动模式或者静音模式，则可以避免干扰到周围的人，但是却容易导致漏接来电。尤其在嘈杂或者室外环境下，漏接来电的可能性则更大。In electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets, there are usually three sound modes: a ringing mode, a vibrating mode and a silent mode. Using the ring mode can avoid missed calls, but the ringing is very likely to disturb the people around. Especially in a quiet or indoor environment, the interference to the surrounding people is particularly prominent. Using vibration mode or silent mode can avoid disturbing people around, but it is easy to cause missed calls. Especially in noisy or outdoor environments, the possibility of missed calls is even greater.
因此，为了在安静或者室内等环境下不打扰周围的人，以及在嘈杂或者室外等环境下不漏接的电话，用户需要频繁在响铃模式和震动模式之间，或者在响铃模式和静音模式之间切换。例如，在户外场景下，用户可能会将手机放在包里，而不会装在贴身口袋里，这种场景下，用户则需要将声音模式切换成响铃模式。Therefore, in order not to disturb people around in quiet or indoor environments, and not to miss calls in noisy or outdoor environments, users need to frequently switch between ring mode and vibration mode, or between ring mode and silent mode. Switch between modes. For example, in an outdoor scene, the user may put the mobile phone in a bag instead of a personal pocket. In this case, the user needs to switch the sound mode to ring mode.
然而，发明人在实施本申请实施例的过程中发现：在现有技术中，用户需要多步操作才能切换声音模式，操作过程繁琐，不利于快速切换。However, the inventor found in the process of implementing the embodiments of the present application that in the prior art, the user needs to operate in multiple steps to switch the sound mode, and the operation process is cumbersome, which is not conducive to fast switching.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种声音模式的切换方法及电子设备，可以智能的识别出用户的切换意图并推送切换提示，从而可以提高声音模式切换的效率。The present application provides a voice mode switching method and an electronic device, which can intelligently recognize a user's switching intention and push a switching prompt, thereby improving the efficiency of voice mode switching.
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种声音模式的切换方法，该方法可以应用于电子设备。该电子设备支持静音模式、震动模式和响铃模式共三种声音模式。并且，该方法主要用于静音模式或者震动模式向响铃模式切换的场景。其中，电子设备获取电子设备的声音模式和电子设备当前的场景信息，场景信息包括电子设备所处环境的环境音。在声音模式为静音模式或震动模式的情况下，若场景信息满足切换到响铃模式的条件(记为第一预设条件)，电子设备则显示提示信息(即为第一提示信息)用于请求用户确认是否切换为响铃模式。从而可以在满足条件的情况下，自动提示用户切换响铃模式。其中，场景信息满足第一预设条件包括：环境音由安静环境的音量范围(记为第一音量范围)上升至嘈杂环境的音量范围(记为第二音量范围)内。应理解，环境音从第一音量范围上升至第二音量范围，则表明手机从相对安静的环境移动到相对相对嘈杂的环境，此时为了避免在漏接电话，通常会存在切换到响铃模式的需求。而后，电子设备在接收到用户对第一提示信息的第一操作(如对“确认”按钮的点击操作)，则可将声音模式切换为响铃模式。In a first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a method for switching a sound mode, and the method may be applied to an electronic device. The electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode. Moreover, this method is mainly used in the scene where the silent mode or the vibration mode is switched to the ringing mode. Wherein, the electronic device obtains the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device, and the scene information includes the environmental sound of the environment where the electronic device is located. In the case where the sound mode is a silent mode or a vibration mode, if the scene information satisfies the condition for switching to the ringing mode (denoted as the first preset condition), the electronic device displays a prompt message (that is, the first prompt message) for Request user confirmation to switch to ring mode. Therefore, the user may be automatically prompted to switch the ringing mode when the condition is met. Wherein, the scene information meeting the first preset condition includes: the ambient sound rises from the volume range of the quiet environment (recorded as the first volume range) to the volume range of the noisy environment (recorded as the second volume range). It should be understood that when the ambient sound rises from the first volume range to the second volume range, it indicates that the mobile phone moves from a relatively quiet environment to a relatively relatively noisy environment. At this time, in order to avoid missing calls, there is usually a switch to the ring mode demand. Then, when the electronic device receives the user's first operation on the first prompt message (such as the click operation on the "confirm" button), it can switch the sound mode to the ringing mode.
综上所述，采用本申请实施例的方法，电子设备可以在处于静音模式或者震动模式的情况下，识别电子设备是否需要切换到响铃模式。从而可以实现对电子设备切换到响铃模式的需求的智能识别。并且，在识别到满足切换到响铃模式的条件(例如电子设备从安静 的环境移动到嘈杂的环境)下，电子设备可以自动提示用户确认是否切换到响铃模式，以使声音模式的切换准确满足用户的需求。在用户通过提示确认后，电子设备则可切换到响铃模式。而无需用户多步操作(如图1所示)来实现切换。如此，电子设备可以提高静音模式或者震动模式切换到响铃模式的智能性和便捷性。To sum up, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can identify whether the electronic device needs to switch to the ringing mode when it is in the silent mode or the vibration mode. Thereby, the intelligent identification of the need to switch the electronic device to the ringing mode can be realized. Moreover, when it is recognized that the conditions for switching to the ring mode are met (for example, the electronic device moves from a quiet environment to a noisy environment), the electronic device can automatically prompt the user to confirm whether to switch to the ring mode, so that the switching of the sound mode is accurate. Meet the needs of users. After the user confirms by prompting, the electronic device can switch to the ringing mode. There is no need for the user to perform multi-step operations (as shown in FIG. 1 ) to realize switching. In this way, the electronic device can improve the intelligence and convenience of switching from the silent mode or the vibration mode to the ringing mode.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括用于指示电子设备是否连接了可穿戴设备的指示信息(记为第一指示信息)。其中，可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。若第一指示信息指示电子设备连接了可穿戴设备，则不满足切换到响铃模式的条件。该情况下，电子设备可通过可穿戴设备来提示用户来电、消息等，通常不会导致漏接来电、消息等。从而无需切换到响铃模式来提示。反之，若第一指示信息指示电子设备未连接可穿戴设备，则满足切换到响铃模式的条件。该情况下，电子设备需要切换到响铃模式来提示用户来电、消息等。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, the scene information further includes indication information (denoted as first indication information) for indicating whether the electronic device is connected to the wearable device. Wherein, the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses. If the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not met. In this case, the electronic device can prompt the user for an incoming call, message, etc. through the wearable device, usually without causing missed calls, messages, and the like. This eliminates the need to switch to ring mode to alert. Conversely, if the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is not connected to the wearable device, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is met. In this case, the electronic device needs to switch to a ringing mode to prompt the user for incoming calls and messages.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以将电子设备未连接可穿戴设备的场景确定为满足切换到响铃模式的场景。从而可以避免因未连接可穿戴设备而导致漏接的电话或消息等。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can determine the scenario that the electronic device is not connected to the wearable device as a scenario that satisfies switching to the ringing mode. In this way, missed calls or messages caused by not connecting the wearable device can be avoided.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括用于指示可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息(记为第二指示信息)。其中，可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。若第二指示信息指示可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上，则不满足切换到响铃模式的条件。该情况下，电子设备可通过可穿戴设备来提示用户来电、消息等，通常不会导致漏接来电、消息等。从而无需切换到响铃模式来提示。反之，第二指示信息指示可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上，则满足切换到响铃模式的条件。该情况下，电子设备即使连接有可穿戴设备，也可能因为可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上而导致漏接，从而需要切换到响铃模式来提示。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, the scene information further includes indication information (denoted as second indication information) for indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user. Wherein, the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses. If the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn by the user, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not met. In this case, the electronic device can prompt the user for an incoming call, message, etc. through the wearable device, usually without causing missed calls, messages, and the like. This eliminates the need to switch to ring mode to alert. On the contrary, if the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is not worn by the user, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is met. In this case, even if the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the connection may be missed because the wearable device is not worn by the user, and thus needs to be switched to a ringing mode for prompting.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以将可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上的场景确定为满足切换到响铃模式的场景。从而可以避免因可穿戴设备未佩戴而导致漏接的电话或消息等。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can determine a scene where the wearable device is not worn on the user's body as a scene that satisfies switching to the ringing mode. In this way, missed calls or messages due to the wearable device not being worn can be avoided.
应注意，前述通过第一指示信息和第二指示信息来识别的实施例中，电子设备可仅以其中一种指示信息来识别。或者，在一些实施例中，为了提高识别的准确度，可以先识别第一指示信息，在第一指示信息指示电子设备连接了可穿戴设备的情况下，进一步识别第二指示信息，并在第二指示信息指示可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上的情况下，才确定不满足切换到响铃模式的条件。It should be noted that, in the above-mentioned embodiment that is identified by the first indication information and the second indication information, the electronic device may be identified by only one of the indication information. Or, in some embodiments, in order to improve the accuracy of identification, the first indication information can be identified first, and when the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the second indication information can be further identified, and then The second indication information indicates that the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not satisfied until the wearable device is worn on the user's body.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括用于指示电子设备是否正处于使用状态的指示信息(记为第三指示信息)。电子设备正处于使用状态包括以下几种情况中的一种或多种：第一种，电子设备处于亮屏状态。第二种，电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视电子设备的屏幕。第三种，电子设备检测到用户对电子设备的屏幕的触控操作。第四种，当电子设备所处环境的光线较暗，则电子设备极有可能位于背包、口袋等密闭的空间里。该场景下，电子设备通常不是处于使用状态。若电子设备的加速度较大，则电子设备通常是在随着用户的走路、跑步等运动而运动。该场景下，电子设备通常也不会处于使用状态。基于此，电子设备正处于使用状态的另一种情况是：电子设备检测到所属环境的光线强度大于第一预设强度，且电子设备的加速度小于预设加速度。若第三指示信息指 示电子设备正处于上述四种情况中的一种或多种，则不满足切换到响铃模式的条件。该情况下，电子设备正处于使用状态，通常不会存在漏接来电的情况。反之，第三指示信息指示电子设备未处于上述任一种情况中，则满足切换到响铃模式的条件。该情况下，电子设备可能因放在背包等情况而导致漏接。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, the scene information further includes indication information (denoted as third indication information) for indicating whether the electronic device is in use. The electronic device being in use includes one or more of the following situations: first, the electronic device is in a bright screen state. In the second type, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device. In the third type, the electronic device detects a user's touch operation on the screen of the electronic device. Fourth, when the environment where the electronic device is located is dark, the electronic device is likely to be located in a closed space such as a backpack or a pocket. In this scenario, the electronic device is usually not in use. If the acceleration of the electronic device is relatively large, the electronic device is usually moving along with the user's walking, running and other motions. In this scenario, the electronic device is usually not in use either. Based on this, another situation that the electronic device is in use is: the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment it belongs to is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the electronic device is smaller than the preset acceleration. If the third indication information indicates that the electronic device is in one or more of the above four situations, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is not met. In this case, the electronic device is in use, and there is usually no missed call. Conversely, if the third indication information indicates that the electronic device is not in any of the above situations, the condition for switching to the ringing mode is met. In this case, the electronic device may be missed due to the situation such as being placed in a backpack.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以将电子设备未处于使用状态的场景确定为满足切换到响铃模式的场景。从而可以避免因未注意到手机屏幕而导致漏接的电话或消息等。That is to say, by adopting the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can determine the scenario that the electronic device is not in use as the scenario that satisfies switching to the ringing mode. Thereby, missed calls or messages due to not noticing the screen of the mobile phone can be avoided.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括环境所属的环境类型，环境类型包括会议室、办公室、医院、餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、电影院、游乐场和商场中的多种。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：环境类型由非预设类型变化为预设类型。其中，预设类型包括餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、游乐场和/或商场。In a possible design of the first aspect, the scene information also includes the type of environment to which the environment belongs, and the type of environment includes meeting rooms, offices, hospitals, restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, cinemas, playgrounds, and shopping malls. Various. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: changing the environment type from a non-preset type to a preset type. Wherein, the preset types include restaurants, carriages, roadsides, plazas, amusement parks and/or shopping malls.
也就是说，在本实施例中，电子设备将电子设备从医院、办公室等需要安静的环境中，移动到路边、广场等噪音较大的环境中的场景识别为需要切换为响铃模式的场景，从而可以在环境类型发生特定改变后，及时提示切换到响铃模式。That is to say, in this embodiment, the electronic device recognizes the scene where the electronic device moves from a quiet environment such as a hospital or an office to a noisy environment such as a roadside or a square as a scene that needs to be switched to the ringing mode. Scenes, so that after a specific change in the environment type, it can prompt to switch to the ring mode in time.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，在电子设备获取电子设备当前的场景信息之前，电子设备监测电子设备所在环境的第一环境参数；其中，第一环境参数是电子设备运行过程中需要及时采集的，并且采集所需功耗较低的参数，如Wi-Fi连接情况、Wi-Fi列表和/或光线强度。在第一环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，才触发电子设备获取电子设备当前的场景信息。其中，第一环境参数发生预设变化，包括：电子设备从与第一Wi-Fi处于连接状态变化为与第一Wi-Fi断开连接，或者，电子设备从与第二Wi-Fi处于断开状态变化为与第二Wi-Fi连接，其中，第一Wi-Fi和第二Wi-Fi可以是任一Wi-Fi；和/或，电子设备扫描到的Wi-Fi列表由第一Wi-Fi列表变化为第二Wi-Fi列表，第一Wi-Fi列表和第二Wi-Fi列表存在至少一个不同的Wi-Fi；和/或，电子设备所处环境的光线强度由第一强度值变化为第二强度值，第一强度值和第二强度值的差值的绝对值超过预设值。上述第一环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，则表明所处环境存在一定的变化，此时则有可能存在切换声音模式的需求。在该情况下，触发获取场景信息，可以有条件的获取。而无需周期性或者实时的获取场景信息。应理解，获取场景信息(如环境音)所需功耗较高，有条件的获取则可以降低电子设备的功耗。In a possible design of the first aspect, before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, the electronic device monitors the first environmental parameter of the environment where the electronic device is located; wherein, the first environmental parameter is Parameters that need to be collected in time and require low power consumption, such as Wi-Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list, and/or light intensity. The electronic device is triggered to obtain the current scene information of the electronic device only when a preset change occurs to the first environmental parameter. Wherein, the preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device is disconnected from the second Wi-Fi The open state changes to be connected to the second Wi-Fi, wherein the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi can be any Wi-Fi; and/or, the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is determined by the first Wi-Fi -The Fi list changes to the second Wi-Fi list, there is at least one different Wi-Fi in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list; and/or, the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located is changed from the first intensity The value changes to a second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value. When the preset change occurs to the above-mentioned first environmental parameter, it indicates that there is a certain change in the environment. At this time, there may be a need to switch the sound mode. In this case, the scene information can be acquired conditionally by triggering. There is no need to obtain scene information periodically or in real time. It should be understood that acquiring scene information (such as ambient sound) requires relatively high power consumption, and conditional acquisition can reduce power consumption of electronic devices.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，在电子设备获取电子设备当前的场景信息之前，电子设备监测电子设备在第一预设时间内是否存在漏接的电话。在电子设备在第一预设时间段内存在漏接的电话的情况下，才触发电子设备获取电子设备当前的场景信息。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, the electronic device monitors whether there is a missed call within the first preset time. The electronic device is triggered to obtain the current scene information of the electronic device only when there is a missed call in the electronic device within the first preset time period.
同样的，有条件的获取场景信息，而无需周期性或者实时的获取场景信息。应理解，获取场景信息(如环境音)所需功耗较高，有条件的获取则可以降低电子设备的功耗。Similarly, scene information is obtained conditionally, without the need to obtain scene information periodically or in real time. It should be understood that acquiring scene information (such as ambient sound) requires relatively high power consumption, and conditional acquisition can reduce power consumption of electronic devices.
应注意，被标记骚扰标识的电话和/或黑名单中的电话，用户即使看到也极有可能不接，从而无法用于初步识别是否可能切换声音模式。因此，上述漏接的电话不包括被标记骚扰标识的电话和/或黑名单中的电话。It should be noted that even if the user sees the phone marked as harassment and/or the phone in the blacklist, it is very likely not to answer it, so it cannot be used for preliminary identification of whether it is possible to switch the sound mode. Therefore, the above missed calls do not include calls marked as harassment and/or blacklisted calls.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，在电子设备显示第一提示信息之前，电子设备获取用户的用户画像。其中，用户画像包括第一次数，第一次数为电子设备在第二预设时间段内响应于用户的操作切换声音模式的次数。电子设备确定用户画像满足第二预设条件。 其中，用户画像满足第二预设条件，包括：第一次数大于第一预设次数。若第一次数大于第一预设次数，则表明用户有切换声音模式的习惯，而不是长期采用静音模式或者震动模式的用户。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, before the electronic device displays the first prompt information, the electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user. Wherein, the user portrait includes a first number, and the first number is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the user's operation within the second preset time period. The electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition. Wherein, the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition, including: the first number of times is greater than the first preset number of times. If the first count is greater than the first preset count, it indicates that the user has a habit of switching sound modes, rather than a user who has been using silent mode or vibration mode for a long time.
也就是说，在本实施例中，只有当用户画像满足第二预设条件(如第一次数大于第一预设次数)时，电子设备才会提示第一提示信息。如此，可以实现有效推送，提高推送的转化率。That is to say, in this embodiment, only when the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition (for example, the first number is greater than the first preset number), the electronic device will prompt the first prompt information. In this way, effective push can be realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，用户画像还包括第二次数，第二次数为电子设备在第三预设时间段内响应于第一操作切换声音模式的次数。用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：第二次数大于第二预设次数。若第二次数大于第二预设次数，则表明用户可以接受通过推送提示信息来切换声音模式的方式。从而可以进一步实现有效推送，提高推送的转化率。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, the user portrait further includes a second number of times, where the second number is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the first operation within a third preset time period. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count. If the second number of times is greater than the second preset number of times, it indicates that the user can accept the way of switching the sound mode by pushing the prompt information. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，用户画像还包括第三次数，第三次数为电子设备在第四预设时间段内，在环境音大于第一分贝的情况下，响应于用户的操作切换到响铃模式的次数。用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：第三次数大于第三预设次数。若第三次数大于第三预设次数，则表明用户倾向于在环境音较高时切换到响铃模式，而不是随意的切换声音模式。从而可以进一步实现有效推送，提高推送的转化率。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device responds to the user when the ambient sound is greater than the first decibel within the fourth preset time period. The number of times the operation switches to ring mode. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times. If the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times, it indicates that the user tends to switch to the ringing mode when the ambient sound is high, rather than switching the sound mode at will. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，若用户画像不满足第二预设条件，电子设备不显示第一提示信息。如此，可以避免无效推送。例如，可以避免将第一提示信息推送给长年不切换声音模式的用户。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, if the user profile does not satisfy the second preset condition, the electronic device does not display the first prompt information. In this way, invalid pushes can be avoided. For example, it is possible to avoid pushing the first prompt information to users who have not switched sound modes for many years.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，电子设备显示第一提示信息，包括：电子设备在电子设备的锁屏界面中显示第一提示信息；其中，若存在多条通知消息，电子设备将第一提示信息置顶显示。In a possible design manner of the first aspect, the electronic device displays the first prompt information, including: the electronic device displays the first prompt information on the lock screen interface of the electronic device; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device Display the first prompt message on top.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以保证显示在锁屏界面中的提示信息被用户查看到，提高信息的触达率。That is to say, by adopting the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can ensure that the prompt information displayed on the lock screen interface is viewed by the user, thereby increasing the reach rate of the information.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中，电子设备显示第一提示信息，包括：在电子设备当前显示的界面是电子设备的主界面或者应用界面的情况下，当电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视电子设备的屏幕时，电子设备显示第一提示信息。In a possible design of the first aspect, the displaying of the first prompt information by the electronic device includes: when the interface currently displayed by the electronic device is the main interface or the application interface of the electronic device, when the electronic device detects that the user's When the pupil is looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以在检测到用户注视屏幕时才显示第一提示信息，也可以提高信息的触达率。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can display the first prompt information only when it detects that the user is looking at the screen, and can also increase the reach rate of the information.
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种声音模式的切换方法，该方法可以应用于电子设备。该电子设备支持静音模式、震动模式和响铃模式共三种声音模式。并且，该方法主要用于响铃模式向静音模式或者震动模式切换的场景。其中，电子设备获取电子设备的声音模式和电子设备当前的场景信息。场景信息包括电子设备所处环境的环境音。在声音模式为静音模式或震动模式的情况下，若场景信息满足第一预设条件，电子设备则显示第一提示信息。其中，场景信息满足第一预设条件包括：环境音由第二音量范围下降至第一音量范围内；第一提示信息用于请求用户确认是否切换为响铃模式。电子设备响应于用户对第一提示信息的第一操作，将声音模式切换为静音模式或者震动模式。In a second aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a method for switching sound modes, and the method may be applied to electronic devices. The electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode. Moreover, this method is mainly used in a scene where the ring mode is switched to a silent mode or a vibration mode. Wherein, the electronic device obtains the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device. The scene information includes ambient sound of the environment where the electronic device is located. When the sound mode is the silent mode or the vibration mode, if the scene information satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device displays the first prompt information. Wherein, the scene information meeting the first preset condition includes: the ambient sound drops from the second volume range to the first volume range; the first prompt message is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ring mode. In response to the user's first operation on the first prompt information, the electronic device switches the sound mode to a silent mode or a vibration mode.
综上所述，采用本申请实施例的方法，电子设备可以在处于响铃模式的情况下，识别电子设备是否需要切换到静音模式或者震动模式。从而可以实现对电子设备切换到静音模 式或者震动模式的需求的智能识别。并且，在识别到满足切换到静音模式或者震动模式的条件(例如电子设备从嘈杂的环境移动到安静的环境)下，电子设备可以自动提示用户确认是否切换到静音模式或者震动模式，以使声音模式的切换准确满足用户的需求。在用户通过提示确认后，电子设备则可切换到静音模式或者震动模式。而无需用户多步操作来实现切换。如此，可以提高响铃模式切换到静音模式或者震动模式的智能性和便捷性。In summary, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can identify whether the electronic device needs to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode when it is in the ringing mode. Thereby, the intelligent recognition of the demand for switching the electronic device to the silent mode or the vibration mode can be realized. Moreover, when it is recognized that the conditions for switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode are met (for example, the electronic device moves from a noisy environment to a quiet environment), the electronic device may automatically prompt the user to confirm whether to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode to make the sound The switching of modes accurately meets the needs of users. After the user confirms through a prompt, the electronic device can switch to a silent mode or a vibration mode. There is no need for the user to perform multi-step operations to achieve switching. In this way, the intelligence and convenience of switching from the ring mode to the silent mode or the vibration mode can be improved.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示电子设备是否连接了可穿戴设备；其中，可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：第一指示信息指示电子设备连接了可穿戴设备。若第一指示信息指示电子设备连接了可穿戴设备，则可通过可穿戴设备来提示来电或通知消息等，无需响铃提示。In a possible design of the second aspect, the scene information also includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is connected to a wearable device; wherein, the wearable device includes a bracelet, an earphone, a smart At least one of a watch and smart glasses. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device. If the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device, the wearable device may prompt an incoming call or a notification message without ringing a bell.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以将电子设备连接了可穿戴设备的场景确定为满足切换到静音模式或者震动模式的场景。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can determine the scenario where the electronic device is connected to the wearable device as a scenario that satisfies switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上。其中，可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：第二指示信息指示可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上。若第二指示信息指示可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上，则可通过可穿戴设备来提示来电或通知消息等，无需响铃提示。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, the scene information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the wearable device is worn on the user. Wherein, the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn on the user. If the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn on the user's body, the wearable device may be used to prompt an incoming call or a notification message without ringing a bell.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以将可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上的场景确定为满足切换到静音模式或者震动模式的场景。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can determine the scene where the wearable device is worn on the user's body as a scene that satisfies switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示电子设备是否正处于使用状态。电子设备正处于使用状态包括：电子设备处于亮屏状态；和/或，电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视电子设备的屏幕；和/或，电子设备检测到用户对电子设备的屏幕的触控操作；和/或，电子设备检测到环境的光线强度大于第一预设强度，且电子设备的加速度小于预设加速度。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：第一指示信息指示电子设备处于使用状态。应理解，若电子设备处于使用状态，则可以及时查看到来电或者通知消息，从而无需响铃提示。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, the scene information further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is in use. The electronic device being in use includes: the electronic device is in a bright screen state; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user touches the screen of the electronic device operation; and/or, the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the electronic device is less than the preset acceleration. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is in use. It should be understood that if the electronic device is in use, incoming calls or notification messages can be checked in time, so that there is no need to ring the alarm.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以将处于使用状态的场景确定为满足切换到静音模式或者震动模式的场景。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can determine the scene in the use state as a scene that satisfies switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括环境所属的环境类型，环境类型包括会议室、办公室、医院、餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、电影院、游乐场和商场中的多种。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：环境类型由预设类型变化为非预设类型；其中，预设类型包括餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、游乐场和/或商场。In a possible design of the second aspect, the scene information also includes the type of environment to which the environment belongs, and the type of environment includes conference rooms, offices, hospitals, restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, cinemas, playgrounds, and shopping malls. Various. The scene information meeting the first preset condition also includes: changing the environment type from a preset type to a non-preset type; wherein, the preset type includes restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds and/or shopping malls.
也就是说，在本实施例中，电子设备将电子设备从路边、广场等噪音较大的环境的环境中，移动到医院、办公室等需要安静的环境中的场景识别为需要切换为静音模式或者震动模式的场景，从而可以在环境类型发生特定改变后，及时提示切换到静音模式或者震动模式。That is to say, in this embodiment, the electronic device recognizes that the scene where the electronic device moves from a roadside, a plaza, and other environments with high noises to an environment that requires quiet, such as a hospital or an office, needs to be switched to the silent mode. Or the scene of the vibration mode, so that after a specific change in the environment type, it can prompt to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode in time.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，在电子设备获取电子设备当前的场景信息之前，还包括：电子设备监测电子设备所在环境的第一环境参数；其中，第一环境参数包括Wi-Fi连接情况、Wi-Fi列表和/或光线强度。其中，获取电子设备当前的场景信息，包括：在第 一环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，获取电子设备当前的场景信息。第一环境参数发生预设变化，包括：电子设备从与第一Wi-Fi处于连接状态变化为与第一Wi-Fi断开连接，或者，电子设备从与第二Wi-Fi处于断开状态变化为与第二Wi-Fi连接，其中，第一Wi-Fi和第二Wi-Fi可以是任一Wi-Fi。和/或，电子设备扫描到的Wi-Fi列表由第一Wi-Fi列表变化为第二Wi-Fi列表，第一Wi-Fi列表和第二Wi-Fi列表存在至少一个不同的Wi-Fi。和/或，电子设备所处环境的光线强度由第一强度值变化为第二强度值，第一强度值和第二强度值的差值的绝对值超过预设值。上述第一环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，则表明所处环境存在一定的变化，此时则有可能存在切换声音模式的需求。在该情况下，触发获取场景信息，可以有条件的获取。而无需周期性或者实时的获取场景信息。应理解，获取场景信息(如环境音)所需功耗较高，有条件的获取则可以降低电子设备的功耗。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, it further includes: the electronic device monitors a first environmental parameter of the environment where the electronic device is located; wherein the first environmental parameter includes Wi- Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list and/or light intensity. Wherein, obtaining the current scene information of the electronic device includes: obtaining the current scene information of the electronic device when a preset change occurs in the first environmental parameter. The preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device is disconnected from the second Wi-Fi Change to connecting with the second Wi-Fi, wherein, the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi can be any Wi-Fi. And/or, the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is changed from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and there is at least one different Wi-Fi list in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list. . And/or, the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located changes from the first intensity value to the second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value. When the preset change occurs to the above-mentioned first environmental parameter, it indicates that there is a certain change in the environment. At this time, there may be a need to switch the sound mode. In this case, the scene information can be acquired conditionally by triggering. There is no need to obtain scene information periodically or in real time. It should be understood that acquiring scene information (such as ambient sound) requires relatively high power consumption, and conditional acquisition can reduce power consumption of electronic devices.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，在电子设备显示第一提示信息之前，还包括：电子设备获取用户的用户画像；其中，用户画像包括第一次数，第一次数为电子设备在第一预设时间段内响应于用户的操作切换声音模式的次数。电子设备确定用户画像满足第二预设条件；其中，用户画像满足第二预设条件，包括：第一次数大于第一预设次数。In a possible design of the second aspect, before the electronic device displays the first prompt information, it further includes: the electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user; wherein, the user portrait includes the first number, and the first number is the electronic The number of times the device switches sound modes in response to user operations within the first preset time period. The electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition; wherein, the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition, including: the first number of times is greater than the first preset number of times.
也就是说，在本实施例中，只有当用户画像满足第一次数大于第一预设次数时，电子设备才会提示第一提示信息。如此，可以实现有效推送，提高推送的转化率。That is to say, in this embodiment, the electronic device will prompt the first prompt information only when the user portrait satisfies that the first count is greater than the first preset count. In this way, effective push can be realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，用户画像还包括第二次数，第二次数为电子设备在第二预设时间段内响应于第一操作切换声音模式的次数。用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：第二次数大于第二预设次数。若第二次数大于第二预设次数，则表明用户可以接受通过推送提示信息来切换声音模式的方式。从而可以进一步实现有效推送，提高推送的转化率。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, the user portrait further includes a second number of times, and the second number of times is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the first operation within a second preset time period. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count. If the second number of times is greater than the second preset number of times, it indicates that the user can accept the method of switching the sound mode by pushing the prompt information. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，用户画像还包括第三次数，第三次数为电子设备在第三预设时间段内，在环境音小于第一分贝的情况下，响应于用户的操作切换到静音模式或者震动模式的次数。用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：第三次数大于第三预设次数。若第三次数大于第三预设次数，则表明用户倾向于在环境音较小时切换到静音模式或者震动模式，而不是随意的切换声音模式。从而可以进一步实现有效推送，提高推送的转化率。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device responds to the user's voice when the ambient sound is less than the first decibel within the third preset time period. The number of times the operation was switched to silent mode or vibrate mode. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times. If the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times, it indicates that the user tends to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode when the ambient sound is low, rather than switching the sound mode at will. In this way, effective push can be further realized and the conversion rate of push can be improved.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，方法还包括：若用户画像不满足第二预设条件，电子设备不显示第一提示信息。如此，可以避免无效推送。例如，可以避免将第一提示信息推送给长年不切换声音模式的用户。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: if the user profile does not meet the second preset condition, the electronic device does not display the first prompt information. In this way, invalid pushes can be avoided. For example, it is possible to avoid pushing the first prompt information to users who have not switched sound modes for many years.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，电子设备显示第一提示信息，包括：电子设备在电子设备的锁屏界面中显示第一提示信息；其中，若存在多条通知消息，电子设备将第一提示信息置顶显示。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, the electronic device displays the first prompt information, including: the electronic device displays the first prompt information on the lock screen interface of the electronic device; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device Display the first prompt message on top.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以保证显示在锁屏界面中的提示信息被用户查看到，提高信息的触达率。That is to say, by adopting the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can ensure that the prompt information displayed on the lock screen interface is viewed by the user, thereby increasing the reach rate of the information.
在第二方面的一种可能的设计方式中，电子设备显示第一提示信息，包括：在电子设备当前显示的界面是电子设备的主界面或者应用界面的情况下，当电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视电子设备的屏幕时，电子设备显示第一提示信息。In a possible design manner of the second aspect, the displaying of the first prompt information by the electronic device includes: when the interface currently displayed by the electronic device is the main interface or the application interface of the electronic device, when the electronic device detects that the user's When the pupil is looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
也就是说，采用本实施例的方法，电子设备可以在检测到用户注视屏幕时才显示第一 提示信息，也可以提高信息的触达率。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can display the first prompt information only when it detects that the user is looking at the screen, and can also increase the reach rate of the information.
第三方面，本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备，电子设备支持静音模式、震动模式和响铃模式共三种声音模式。电子设备包括显示屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器。显示屏、存储器和处理器耦合。存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当计算机指令被处理器执行时，使得电子设备执行如下步骤：电子设备获取所述电子设备的声音模式和所述电子设备当前的场景信息；其中，所述声音模式为静音模式、震动模式或响铃模式；所述场景信息包括所述电子设备所处环境的环境音；In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, and the electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode. Electronic devices include a display, memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device performs the following steps: the electronic device acquires the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device ; Wherein, the sound mode is a silent mode, a vibration mode or a ringing mode; the scene information includes the environmental sound of the environment where the electronic device is located;
在所述声音模式为所述静音模式或所述震动模式的情况下，若所述场景信息满足第一预设条件，所述电子设备则显示第一提示信息；其中，所述场景信息满足第一预设条件包括：所述环境音由第一音量范围上升至第二音量范围内；所述第一提示信息用于请求用户确认是否切换为所述响铃模式；When the sound mode is the silent mode or the vibration mode, if the scene information satisfies a first preset condition, the electronic device displays first prompt information; wherein, the scene information satisfies a first preset condition. A preset condition includes: the ambient sound rises from the first volume range to the second volume range; the first prompt message is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ringing mode;
所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第一提示信息的第一操作，将所述声音模式切换为所述响铃模式。The electronic device switches the sound mode to the ringing mode in response to a user's first operation on the first prompt information.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，所述场景信息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述电子设备是否连接了可穿戴设备；其中，所述可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：所述第一指示信息指示所述电子设备未连接所述可穿戴设备。In a possible design of the third aspect, the scene information further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is connected to a wearable device; wherein, the wearable The device includes at least one of a bracelet, earphones, smart watch and smart glasses. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is not connected to the wearable device.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，所述场景信息还包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上；其中，所述可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：所述第二指示信息指示所述可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上。In a possible design of the third aspect, the scene information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the wearable device is worn on the user; wherein, the wearable device The device includes at least one of a bracelet, earphones, smart watch and smart glasses. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the second indication information indicating that the wearable device is not worn by the user.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，所述场景信息还包括第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述电子设备是否正处于使用状态。所述电子设备正处于使用状态包括：所述电子设备处于亮屏状态。和/或，所述电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视所述电子设备的屏幕。和/或，所述电子设备检测到用户对所述电子设备的屏幕的触控操作；和/或，所述电子设备检测到所述环境的光线强度大于第一预设强度，且所述电子设备的加速度小于预设加速度。所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：所述第三指示信息指示所述电子设备未处于使用状态。In a possible design of the third aspect, the scene information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is in use. The electronic device being in use includes: the electronic device is in a bright screen state. And/or, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device. And/or, the electronic device detects a user's touch operation on the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than a first preset intensity, and the electronic The acceleration of the device is less than the preset acceleration. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the third indication information indicating that the electronic device is not in use.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，所述场景信息还包括所述环境所属的环境类型，所述环境类型包括会议室、办公室、医院、餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、电影院、游乐场和商场中的多种。所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：所述环境类型由非预设类型变化为预设类型；其中，所述预设类型包括餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、游乐场和/或商场。In a possible design manner of the third aspect, the scene information further includes the environment type to which the environment belongs, and the environment type includes conference room, office, hospital, restaurant, carriage, roadside, square, movie theater, Variety in playgrounds and malls. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: changing the environment type from a non-preset type to a preset type; wherein, the preset type includes restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds and / or mall.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：所述电子设备监测所述电子设备所在环境的第一环境参数；其中，所述第一环境参数包括Wi-Fi连接情况、Wi-Fi列表和/或光线强度。在所述第一环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息。其中，所述第一环境参数发生预设变化，包括：所述电子设备从与第一Wi-Fi处于连接状态变化为与所述第一Wi-Fi断开连接，或者，所述电子设备从与第二Wi-Fi处于断开状态变化为与所述第二Wi-Fi连接，其中，所述第一Wi-Fi和所述第二Wi-Fi可以是任一Wi-Fi。和/或，所述电子设备 扫描到的Wi-Fi列表由第一Wi-Fi列表变化为第二Wi-Fi列表，所述第一Wi-Fi列表和所述第二Wi-Fi列表存在至少一个不同的Wi-Fi。和/或，所述电子设备所处环境的光线强度由第一强度值变化为第二强度值，所述第一强度值和所述第二强度值的差值的绝对值超过预设值。In a possible design of the third aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed by the following step: the electronic device monitors the first Environmental parameters; wherein, the first environmental parameters include Wi-Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list and/or light intensity. Acquiring current scene information of the electronic device when the first environmental parameter undergoes a preset change. Wherein, the preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi Being disconnected from the second Wi-Fi is changed to being connected to the second Wi-Fi, wherein the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi may be any Wi-Fi. And/or, the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is changed from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list exist at least A different Wi-Fi. And/or, the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located changes from a first intensity value to a second intensity value, and an absolute value of a difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：所述电子设备监测所述电子设备在第一预设时间内是否存在漏接的电话。在所述电子设备在第一预设时间段内存在漏接的电话的情况下，获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息。In a possible design of the third aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: the electronic device monitors that the electronic device is in the first preset Whether there are missed calls within the time. If there is a missed call in the electronic device within the first preset time period, the current scene information of the electronic device is acquired.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，所述漏接的电话不包括被标记骚扰标识的电话和/或所述黑名单中的电话。In a possible design manner of the third aspect, the missed calls do not include calls marked as harassment and/or calls in the blacklist.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：所述电子设备获取用户的用户画像；其中，所述用户画像包括第一次数，所述第一次数为所述电子设备在第二预设时间段内响应于用户的操作切换声音模式的次数。所述电子设备确定所述用户画像满足第二预设条件。其中，所述用户画像满足第二预设条件，包括：所述第一次数大于第一预设次数。In a possible design manner of the third aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user; wherein, the The user portrait includes a first count, and the first count is the number of times the electronic device switches sound modes in response to user operations within a second preset time period. The electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies a second preset condition. Wherein, the user portrait satisfies a second preset condition, including: the first count is greater than the first preset count.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，所述用户画像还包括第二次数，所述第二次数为所述电子设备在所述第三预设时间段内响应于所述第一操作切换声音模式的次数。所述用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：所述第二次数大于第二预设次数。In a possible design of the third aspect, the user portrait further includes a second number of times, the second number is the electronic device responding to the first operation within the third preset time period. Number of times to switch sound modes. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，所述用户画像还包括第三次数，所述第三次数为所述电子设备在第四预设时间段内，在环境音大于第一分贝的情况下，响应于用户的操作切换到响铃模式的次数。所述用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：所述第三次数大于第三预设次数。In a possible design manner of the third aspect, the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device, within a fourth preset period of time, has an ambient sound greater than the first decibel case, the number of times the user switched to ring mode in response to an action by the user. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third count is greater than the third preset count.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：若所述用户画像不满足第二预设条件，所述电子设备不显示所述第一提示信息。In a possible design of the third aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: if the user portrait does not meet the second preset condition, the The electronic device does not display the first prompt information.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：所述电子设备在所述电子设备的锁屏界面中显示所述第一提示信息；其中，若存在多条通知消息，所述电子设备将所述第一提示信息置顶显示。In a possible design of the third aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed the following step: the electronic device is in the lock screen interface of the electronic device displaying the first prompt information; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device displays the first prompt information on top.
在第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：在所述电子设备当前显示的界面是所述电子设备的主界面或者应用界面的情况下，当所述电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视所述电子设备的屏幕时，所述电子设备显示所述第一提示信息。In a possible design of the third aspect, when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: the interface currently displayed on the electronic device is the In the case of the main interface or the application interface of , when the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
第四方面，本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备，电子设备支持静音模式、震动模式和响铃模式共三种声音模式。电子设备包括显示屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器。显示屏、存储器和处理器耦合。存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当计算机指令被处理器执行时，使得电子设备执行如下步骤：电子设备获取电子设备的声音模式和电子设备当前的场景信息。场景信息包括电子设备所处环境的环境音。在声音模式为静音模式或震动模式的情况下，若场景信息满足第一预设条件，电子设备则显示第一提示信息。其中，场景信息满足第一预设条件包括：环境音由第二音量范围下降至第一音 量范围内；第一提示信息用于请求用户确认是否切换为响铃模式。电子设备响应于用户对第一提示信息的第一操作，将声音模式切换为静音模式或者震动模式。In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, and the electronic device supports three sound modes including a silent mode, a vibrating mode and a ringing mode. Electronic devices include a display, memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program codes. The computer program codes include computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device executes the following steps: the electronic device acquires the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device. The scene information includes ambient sound of the environment where the electronic device is located. When the sound mode is the silent mode or the vibration mode, if the scene information satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device displays the first prompt information. Wherein, the scene information meeting the first preset condition includes: the ambient sound drops from the second volume range to the first volume range; the first prompt message is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ring mode. In response to the user's first operation on the first prompt information, the electronic device switches the sound mode to a silent mode or a vibration mode.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示电子设备是否连接了可穿戴设备；其中，可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：第一指示信息指示电子设备连接了可穿戴设备。In a possible design of the fourth aspect, the scene information also includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is connected to a wearable device; wherein, the wearable device includes a bracelet, an earphone, a smart At least one of a watch and smart glasses. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is connected to the wearable device.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上。其中，可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：第二指示信息指示可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上。In a possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the scene information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the wearable device is worn on the user. Wherein, the wearable device includes at least one of a wristband, earphone, smart watch and smart glasses. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the second indication information indicates that the wearable device is worn on the user.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示电子设备是否正处于使用状态。电子设备正处于使用状态包括：电子设备处于亮屏状态；和/或，电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视电子设备的屏幕；和/或，电子设备检测到用户对电子设备的屏幕的触控操作；和/或，电子设备检测到环境的光线强度大于第一预设强度，且电子设备的加速度小于预设加速度。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：第一指示信息指示电子设备处于使用状态。In a possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the scene information further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is in use. The electronic device being in use includes: the electronic device is in a bright screen state; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user touches the screen of the electronic device operation; and/or, the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the electronic device is less than the preset acceleration. The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is in use.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，场景信息还包括环境所属的环境类型，环境类型包括会议室、办公室、医院、餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、电影院、游乐场和商场中的多种。场景信息满足第一预设条件还包括：环境类型由预设类型变化为非预设类型；其中，预设类型包括餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、游乐场和/或商场。In a possible design of the fourth aspect, the scene information also includes the type of environment to which the environment belongs. Various. The scene information meeting the first preset condition also includes: changing the environment type from a preset type to a non-preset type; wherein, the preset type includes restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds and/or shopping malls.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：电子设备监测电子设备所在环境的第一环境参数；其中，第一环境参数包括Wi-Fi连接情况、Wi-Fi列表和/或光线强度。在第一环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，获取电子设备当前的场景信息。第一环境参数发生预设变化，包括：电子设备从与第一Wi-Fi处于连接状态变化为与第一Wi-Fi断开连接，或者，电子设备从与第二Wi-Fi处于断开状态变化为与第二Wi-Fi连接，其中，第一Wi-Fi和第二Wi-Fi可以是任一Wi-Fi。和/或，电子设备扫描到的Wi-Fi列表由第一Wi-Fi列表变化为第二Wi-Fi列表，第一Wi-Fi列表和第二Wi-Fi列表存在至少一个不同的Wi-Fi。和/或，电子设备所处环境的光线强度由第一强度值变化为第二强度值，第一强度值和第二强度值的差值的绝对值超过预设值。In a possible design manner of the fourth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the electronic device monitors a first environmental parameter of the environment where the electronic device is located; wherein , the first environment parameter includes Wi-Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list and/or light intensity. Acquiring current scene information of the electronic device when a preset change occurs to the first environmental parameter. The preset change of the first environmental parameter includes: the electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the electronic device is disconnected from the second Wi-Fi Change to connecting with the second Wi-Fi, wherein, the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi can be any Wi-Fi. And/or, the Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is changed from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and there is at least one different Wi-Fi list in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list. . And/or, the light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located changes from the first intensity value to the second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：电子设备获取用户的用户画像；其中，用户画像包括第一次数，第一次数为电子设备在第一预设时间段内响应于用户的操作切换声音模式的次数。电子设备确定用户画像满足第二预设条件；其中，用户画像满足第二预设条件，包括：第一次数大于第一预设次数。In a possible design manner of the fourth aspect, when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user; wherein the user portrait includes the first A number, the first number is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the user's operation within the first preset time period. The electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition; wherein, the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition, including: the first number of times is greater than the first preset number of times.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，用户画像还包括第二次数，第二次数为电子设备在第二预设时间段内响应于第一操作切换声音模式的次数。用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：第二次数大于第二预设次数。In a possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the user portrait further includes a second number of times, and the second number of times is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the first operation within a second preset time period. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，用户画像还包括第三次数，第三次数为电子设 备在第三预设时间段内，在环境音小于第二分贝的情况下，响应于用户的操作切换到静音模式或者震动模式的次数。用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：第三次数大于第三预设次数。In a possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the user portrait further includes a third time, the third time being that the electronic device responds to the user's voice when the ambient sound is less than the second decibel within the third preset time period. The number of times the operation was switched to silent mode or vibrate mode. The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third number of times is greater than the third preset number of times.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：若用户画像不满足第二预设条件，电子设备不显示第一提示信息。In a possible design of the fourth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: if the user portrait does not meet the second preset condition, the electronic device does not Display the first prompt message.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：电子设备在电子设备的锁屏界面中显示第一提示信息；其中，若存在多条通知消息，电子设备将第一提示信息置顶显示。In a possible design of the fourth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed by the following step: the electronic device displays the first prompt on the lock screen interface of the electronic device information; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device will display the first prompt message on top.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤：在电子设备当前显示的界面是电子设备的主界面或者应用界面的情况下，当电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视电子设备的屏幕时，电子设备显示第一提示信息。In a possible design of the fourth aspect, when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following steps: the interface currently displayed on the electronic device is the main interface of the electronic device or In the case of an application interface, when the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the first prompt information.
第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片***，该芯片***应用于包括显示屏和存储器的电子设备；所述芯片***包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器；所述接口电路和所述处理器通过线路互联；所述接口电路用于从所述电子设备的存储器接收信号，并向所述处理器发送所述信号，所述信号包括所述存储器中存储的计算机指令；当所述处理器执行所述计算机指令时，所述电子设备执行如第一方面、第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In the fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which is applied to an electronic device including a display screen and a memory; the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors; the interface The circuit and the processor are interconnected by a line; the interface circuit is configured to receive a signal from a memory of the electronic device and send the signal to the processor, the signal including computer instructions stored in the memory; When the processor executes the computer instruction, the electronic device executes the method described in the first aspect, the second aspect and any possible design manner thereof.
第六方面，本申请提供一种计算机存储介质，包括计算机指令，当计算机指令在服务器上运行时，使得服务器执行如第一方面、第二方案及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on the server, the server executes the method described in the first aspect, the second solution and any possible design thereof .
第七方面，本申请提供一种计算机程序产品，当计算机程序产品在服务器上运行时，使得服务器执行如第一方面、第二方案及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a computer program product that, when running on a server, causes the server to execute the method described in the first aspect, the second solution and any possible design thereof.
可以理解地，上述提供的第二方面所述的电子设备、第三方面所述的***芯片、第四方面所述的计算机存储介质，以及第五方面所述的计算机程序产品均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。Understandably, the electronic device described in the second aspect, the system chip described in the third aspect, the computer storage medium described in the fourth aspect, and the computer program product described in the fifth aspect provided above are all used to execute For the corresponding methods provided herein, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the beneficial effects of the corresponding methods provided above, and will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1示出了本申请实施例提供的手机界面之一的示意图；Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of one of the mobile phone interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图2示出了本申请实施例提供的一种手机的硬件结构的示意图；FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3示出了本申请实施例提供的声音模式的切换方法之一的流程图；FIG. 3 shows a flow chart of one of the voice mode switching methods provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4示出了本申请实施例提供的声音模式的切换方法之二的流程图；FIG. 4 shows a flow chart of the second method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图5示出了本申请实施例提供的手机界面之二的示意图；Fig. 5 shows a schematic diagram of the second mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6示出了本申请实施例提供的一种手机处于灭屏状态的示意图；FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of a mobile phone in an off-screen state provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的手机界面之三的示意图；Fig. 7 shows a schematic diagram of the third mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的手机界面之四的示意图；Fig. 8 shows a schematic diagram of the fourth mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9示出了本申请实施例提供的手机界面之五的示意图；Fig. 9 shows a schematic diagram of the fifth mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的声音模式的切换方法之三的流程图；FIG. 10 shows a flowchart of the third method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11示出了本申请实施例提供的声音模式的切换方法之四的流程图；FIG. 11 shows a flowchart of the fourth method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12示出了本申请实施例提供的手机界面之六的示意图；Fig. 12 shows a schematic diagram of the sixth mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13示出了本申请实施例提供的手机界面之七的示意图；Fig. 13 shows a schematic diagram of the seventh mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图14示出了本申请实施例提供的声音模式的切换方法之五的流程图；FIG. 14 shows a flowchart of the fifth method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图15示出了本申请实施例提供的声音模式的切换方法之六的流程图；FIG. 15 shows a flowchart of the sixth method for switching sound modes provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图16示出了本申请实施例提供的一种***芯片的结构图。FIG. 16 shows a structural diagram of a system chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
以下，术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more.
为了便于对本申请实施例的理解，下面先以电子设备是手机为例，并结合图1中对常规技术手段进行说明。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following first takes the electronic device as a mobile phone as an example, and describes conventional technical means in conjunction with FIG. 1 .
在常规技术中，若用户需要切换声音模式，则通常需要执行如下操作：In conventional technology, if the user needs to switch the sound mode, the following operations are usually required:
步骤a，用户需要对手机解锁。示例性的，在解锁后，手机可显示图1中的(a)示出的界面101。In step a, the user needs to unlock the mobile phone. Exemplarily, after unlocking, the mobile phone may display the interface 101 shown in (a) in FIG. 1 .
步骤b，用户需要下滑调出通知栏，该通知栏中包括调节控件，调节控件用于触发手机调节声音模式。示例性的，手机响应于用户在图1中的(a)示出的界面101中的下滑操作，可显示图1中的(b)示出的界面102。该界面102中包括通知栏103，通知栏103中包括调节控件104。该调节控件104用于触发手机切换声音模式。该调节控件104指示当前的声音模式为静音模式。In step b, the user needs to slide down to call out the notification bar, which includes an adjustment control, which is used to trigger the mobile phone to adjust the sound mode. Exemplarily, the mobile phone may display the interface 102 shown in (b) in FIG. 1 in response to the user's sliding operation on the interface 101 shown in (a) in FIG. 1 . The interface 102 includes a notification bar 103 , and the notification bar 103 includes an adjustment control 104 . The adjustment control 104 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch the sound mode. The adjustment control 104 indicates that the current sound mode is the silent mode.
步骤c，用户需要点击调节控件以调节声音模式。示例性的，手机响应于用户对图1中的(b)示出界面102中通知栏103中调节控件104的点击操作，可显示图1中的(c)示出的界面105。该界面105中包括通知栏106，通知栏106中包括调节控件107。该调节控件107用于触发手机切换声音模式。该调节控件107指示当前的声音模式为响铃模式。至此，则完成了从静音模式向响铃模式的切换。In step c, the user needs to click the adjustment control to adjust the sound mode. Exemplarily, the mobile phone may display the interface 105 shown in (c) in FIG. The interface 105 includes a notification bar 106 , and the notification bar 106 includes an adjustment control 107 . The adjustment control 107 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch the sound mode. The adjustment control 107 indicates that the current sound mode is the ring mode. So far, the switch from the silent mode to the ringing mode is completed.
由此可见，上述切换声音模式的过程，需要用户3步点选，整个切换过程操作较为繁琐，不利于快捷切换。It can be seen that the above-mentioned process of switching the sound mode requires the user to click and select in 3 steps, and the operation of the entire switching process is relatively cumbersome, which is not conducive to quick switching.
基于此，本申请实施例提供了一种声音模式的切换方法，应用于电子设备，该电子设备可支持响铃模式、震动模式和静音模式。具体地，电子设备可以获取电子设备的状态信息和环境信息。其中，状态信息可以用于指示电子设备的声音模式和/或位置等状态。例如，状态信息可以是电子设备当前采用静音模式。环境信息可以用于指示电子设备所处的环境。例如，该环境可以是室内环境、路边环境。又如，该环境可以是嘈杂环境、安静环境。电子设备可以根据上述状态信息和环境信息识别出用户对声音模式的切换意图，实现智能识别切换意图。Based on this, an embodiment of the present application provides a sound mode switching method, which is applied to an electronic device, and the electronic device can support a ring mode, a vibration mode and a silent mode. Specifically, the electronic device can acquire status information and environment information of the electronic device. Wherein, the state information may be used to indicate states such as sound mode and/or position of the electronic device. For example, the status information may be that the electronic device is currently in a silent mode. Environmental information may be used to indicate the environment in which the electronic device is located. For example, the environment may be an indoor environment, a roadside environment. As another example, the environment may be a noisy environment or a quiet environment. The electronic device can recognize the user's intention to switch the sound mode according to the above state information and environment information, so as to realize intelligent identification of the switching intention.
在识别出用户的切换意图后，电子设备可主动显示切换提示。该切换提示用于提示切换声音模式，还可以用于触发电子设备切换声音模式。如此，通过该提示消息便可以为用户提供切换声音模式的快捷入口。After recognizing the switching intention of the user, the electronic device can actively display the switching prompt. The switch prompt is used to prompt to switch the sound mode, and can also be used to trigger the electronic device to switch the sound mode. In this way, the prompt message can provide the user with a quick entry to switch the sound mode.
综上所述，采用本申请实施例的方法，在用户有切换意图时，为用户提供切换声音模 式的快捷入口。而后，用户仅需对该提示消息执行一步操作，即可完成声音模式的切换。从而可以简化声音模式的切换流程，提高了声音模式切换的便捷性。In summary, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, when the user has the intention to switch, provide the user with a shortcut to switch the sound mode. Then, the user only needs to perform one-step operation on the prompt message to complete the switching of the sound mode. Therefore, the switching process of the sound mode can be simplified, and the convenience of switching the sound mode is improved.
示例性的，本申请实施例中的电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、桌面型、膝上型、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer，UMPC)、上网本，以及蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)\虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备等设备，本申请实施例对该设备的具体形态不作特殊限制。Exemplary, the electronic equipment in the embodiment of the present application can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a desktop, a laptop, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook, and a cellular Telephone, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)\virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment and other equipment, the embodiment of the present application does not make special restrictions on the specific form of the equipment.
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例的实施方式进行详细描述。The implementation of the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
请参考图2，为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的结构示意图。如图2所示，以电子设备是手机200为例，手机200可以包括处理器210，外部存储器接口220，内部存储器221，通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口230，充电管理模块240，电源管理模块241，电池242，天线1，天线2，移动通信模块250，无线通信模块260，音频模块270，扬声器270A，受话器270B，麦克风270C，耳机接口270D，传感器模块280，按键290，马达291，指示器292，摄像头293，显示屏294，以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡接口295等。Please refer to FIG. 2 , which is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, taking the electronic device as a mobile phone 200 as an example, the mobile phone 200 may include a processor 210, an external memory interface 220, an internal memory 221, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 230, and a charging management module 240 , power management module 241, battery 242, antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 250, wireless communication module 260, audio module 270, speaker 270A, receiver 270B, microphone 270C, earphone jack 270D, sensor module 280, button 290, motor 291, an indicator 292, a camera 293, a display screen 294, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 295, etc.
可以理解的是，本实施例示意的结构并不构成对手机200的具体限定。在另一些实施例中，手机200可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure shown in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the mobile phone 200 . In other embodiments, the mobile phone 200 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器210可以包括一个或多个处理单元，例如：处理器210可以包括应用处理器(application processor，AP)，调制解调处理器，图形处理器(graphics processing unit，GPU)，图像信号处理器(image signal processor，ISP)，控制器，存储器，视频编解码器，数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，基带处理器，和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit，NPU)等。其中，不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件，也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 210 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 210 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以是手机200的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号，产生操作控制信号，完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the handset 200 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
处理器210中还可以设置存储器，用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中，处理器210中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器210刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器210需要再次使用该指令或数据，可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取，减少了处理器210的等待时间，因而提高了***的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 210 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 210 is a cache memory. The memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 210 has just used or recycled. If the processor 210 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 210 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
充电管理模块240用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中，充电器可以是无线充电器，也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块240可以通过USB接口230接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块240可以通过手机200的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块240为电池242充电的同时，还可以通过电源管理模块241为手机供电。The charging management module 240 is configured to receive charging input from the charger. Wherein, the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some embodiments of wired charging, the charging management module 240 can receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 230 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 240 can receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the mobile phone 200 . While the charging management module 240 is charging the battery 242 , it can also provide power for the mobile phone through the power management module 241 .
电源管理模块241用于连接电池242，充电管理模块240与处理器210。电源管理模块241接收电池242和/或充电管理模块240的输入，为处理器210，内部存储器221，外部存储器，显示屏294，摄像头293，和无线通信模块260等供电。电源管理模块241还可以用于监测电池容量，电池循环次数，电池健康状态(漏电，阻抗)等参数。在其他一 些实施例中，电源管理模块241也可以设置于处理器210中。在另一些实施例中，电源管理模块241和充电管理模块240也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 241 is used for connecting the battery 242 , the charging management module 240 and the processor 210 . The power management module 241 receives the input from the battery 242 and/or the charging management module 240 to provide power for the processor 210 , internal memory 221 , external memory, display screen 294 , camera 293 , and wireless communication module 260 . The power management module 241 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 241 can also be set in the processor 210. In some other embodiments, the power management module 241 and the charging management module 240 may also be set in the same device.
手机200的无线通信功能可以通过天线1，天线2，移动通信模块250，无线通信模块260，调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the mobile phone 200 can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 250, the wireless communication module 260, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
手机200通过GPU，显示屏294，以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器，连接显示屏294和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算，用于图形渲染。处理器210可包括一个或多个GPU，其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The mobile phone 200 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 294, and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 294 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 210 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏294用于显示图像，视频等。该显示屏294是上述折叠屏(如柔性折叠屏或多屏折叠屏)。显示屏294包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode，OLED)，有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode，AMOLED)，柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode，FLED)，Miniled，MicroLed，Micro-oLed，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes，QLED)等。The display screen 294 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 294 is the above-mentioned folding screen (such as a flexible folding screen or a multi-screen folding screen). Display 294 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
手机200可以通过ISP，摄像头293，视频编解码器，GPU，显示屏294以及APP处理器等实现拍摄功能。The mobile phone 200 can realize the shooting function through ISP, camera 293 , video codec, GPU, display screen 294 and APP processor.
外部存储器接口220可以用于连接外部存储卡，例如Micro SD卡，实现扩展手机200的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口220与处理器210通信，实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐，视频等媒体文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 220 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the mobile phone 200. The external memory card communicates with the processor 210 through the external memory interface 220 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other media files in the external memory card.
内部存储器221可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码，所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器210通过运行存储在内部存储器221的指令，从而执行手机200的各种功能APP以及数据处理。内部存储器221可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中，存储程序区可存储操作***，至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能，图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储手机200使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据，电话本等)等。此外，内部存储器221可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件，闪存器件，通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage，UFS)等。The internal memory 221 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions. The processor 210 executes various functions APP and data processing of the mobile phone 200 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 221 . The internal memory 221 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data. Wherein, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like. The storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the mobile phone 200 . In addition, the internal memory 221 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
手机200可以通过音频模块270，扬声器270A，受话器270B，麦克风270C，耳机接口270D，以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放，录音等。The mobile phone 200 can realize the audio function through the audio module 270, the speaker 270A, the receiver 270B, the microphone 270C, the earphone interface 270D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
按键290包括开机键，音量键等。按键290可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。手机200可以接收按键输入，产生与手机200的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The keys 290 include a power key, a volume key and the like. The key 290 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The mobile phone 200 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile phone 200 .
马达291可以产生振动提示。马达291可以用于来电振动提示，也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如，作用于不同应用(例如拍照，音频播放等)的触摸操作，可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏294不同区域的触摸操作，马达291也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如：时间提醒，接收信息，闹钟，游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 291 can generate a vibrating reminder. The motor 291 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) may correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 291 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 294 . Different application scenarios (for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器292可以是指示灯，可以用于指示充电状态，电量变化，也可以用于指示消息，未接来电，通知等。The indicator 292 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, the change of the battery capacity, and also can be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications and so on.
SIM卡接口295用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过***SIM卡接口295，或从SIM卡接口295拔出，实现和手机200的接触和分离。手机200可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口，N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口295可以支持Nano SIM卡，Micro SIM卡，SIM 卡等。同一个SIM卡接口295可以同时***多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同，也可以不同。SIM卡接口295也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口295也可以兼容外部存储卡。手机200通过SIM卡和网络交互，实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中，手机200采用eSIM，即：嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在手机200中，不能和手机200分离。The SIM card interface 295 is used for connecting a SIM card. The SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 295 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 295 to realize contact and separation with the mobile phone 200 . The mobile phone 200 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 295 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 295 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with external memory cards. The mobile phone 200 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication. In some embodiments, the mobile phone 200 adopts eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the mobile phone 200 and cannot be separated from the mobile phone 200 .
以下实施例中的方法均可以在具有上述硬件结构的手机200中实现。The methods in the following embodiments can all be implemented in the mobile phone 200 having the above hardware structure.
在本申请实施例，手机可以根据手机的状态信息和环境信息智能的识别出用户对声音模式的切换意图。其中，状态信息用于指示手机采用的声音模式和/或位置等状态，环境信息用于指示手机所在的环境，包括环境音和/或环境场所等。在识别出切换声音模式至模式1的切换意图后，手机显示切换提示。从而给用户提供切换到模式1的快捷入口。而后，手机响应于用户对该切换提示的一步操作即可将声音模式切换至模式1。从而简化切换声音模式的流程，提高切换的便捷性。应注意，在本申请实施例中，可以将除手机当前采用的声音模式之外的状态信息和环境信息统称为场景信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone can intelligently recognize the user's intention to switch the sound mode according to the status information and environmental information of the mobile phone. Wherein, the status information is used to indicate the sound mode adopted by the mobile phone and/or the status such as location, and the environment information is used to indicate the environment where the mobile phone is located, including environmental sound and/or environmental location. After recognizing the switching intention of switching the sound mode to mode 1, the mobile phone displays a switching prompt. In this way, the user is provided with a shortcut to switch to mode 1. Then, the mobile phone can switch the sound mode to mode 1 in response to the user's one-step operation on the switching prompt. This simplifies the process of switching sound modes and improves the convenience of switching. It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, state information and environment information other than the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone may be collectively referred to as scene information.
进一步的，切换意图主要包括以下两种：第一种，从静音模式或震动模式向响铃模式切换的意图(记为场景1)，或者，从响铃模式向静音模式或震动模式切换的意图(记为场景2)。Further, the switch intention mainly includes the following two types: first, the intention to switch from silent mode or vibration mode to ring mode (denoted as scene 1), or the intention to switch from ring mode to silent mode or vibration mode (denoted as scene 2).
下文实施例中，将分别针对上述场景1和场景2来具体说明本申请实施例提供的声音模式的切换方法。In the following embodiments, the voice mode switching method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be specifically described for the above-mentioned scenario 1 and scenario 2 respectively.
场景1，本申请实施例提供一种声音模式的切换方法，在本实施例中，声音模式的切换是指从静音模式或者震动模式切换为响铃模式，即模式1是响铃模式。具体的，如图3所示，该方法包括S301-S307。 Scenario 1. This embodiment of the present application provides a method for switching sound modes. In this embodiment, switching sound modes refers to switching from silent mode or vibration mode to ring mode, that is, mode 1 is ring mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the method includes S301-S307.
S301、***测其所处环境的预设环境参数是否发生预设变化。若是，则执行S302；若否，则继续执行S301。S301. The mobile phone monitors whether a preset environmental parameter of the environment where the mobile phone is located undergoes a preset change. If yes, execute S302; if not, continue to execute S301.
其中，预设环境参数又可以称为第一环境参数。预设环境参数是可以反映环境状况的参数。例如，预设环境参数可以是光线强度、色温、Wi-Fi连接情况以及Wi-Fi列表中的一项或多项。若预设环境参数发生预设变化，则表明手机所处的环境发生了明显变化。这种情况下可以初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求。Wherein, the preset environment parameter may also be referred to as the first environment parameter. The preset environmental parameters are parameters that can reflect environmental conditions. For example, the preset environmental parameters may be one or more of light intensity, color temperature, Wi-Fi connection status and Wi-Fi list. If the preset environment parameter changes, it indicates that the environment in which the mobile phone is located has changed significantly. In this case, it can be preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode.
在本申请实施例中，通过监测预设环境参数的变化来初步确定用户是否存在切换声音模式的需求。上述预设环境参数可以是采集时所需功耗较低的环境参数，例如，预设环境参数是Wi-Fi连接情况。或者，上述预设环境参数可以是手机运行过程中日常需要采集的环境参数，例如，预设环境参数是光线强度。从而上述预设环境参数的采集无需更多额外的功耗。手机通过检测其所在环境的预设环境参数，并在预设环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，才执行S302，进一步有针对性的采集信息(如状态信息、环境信息)并识别用户的切换意图。反之，则继续监测预设环境参数的变化。应注意，采集状态信息、环境信息的过程以及识别切换意图的过程，通常都是功耗较高的处理过程，例如，采集环境音的功耗极高。如此，手机可以有针对性的执行功耗较高的处理过程，从而可以极大地降低手机功耗。In the embodiment of the present application, it is preliminarily determined whether the user has a need to switch sound modes by monitoring changes in preset environmental parameters. The aforementioned preset environmental parameters may be environmental parameters that require relatively low power consumption during collection, for example, the preset environmental parameters are Wi-Fi connection conditions. Alternatively, the aforementioned preset environmental parameters may be environmental parameters that need to be collected daily during the operation of the mobile phone, for example, the preset environmental parameters are light intensity. Therefore, the acquisition of the aforementioned preset environmental parameters does not require any additional power consumption. The mobile phone detects the preset environmental parameters of its environment, and only executes S302 when the preset environmental parameters change, and further collects information (such as status information, environmental information) in a targeted manner and identifies the user's switching intention. Otherwise, continue to monitor the changes of the preset environmental parameters. It should be noted that the process of collecting state information and environment information and the process of identifying switching intentions are usually processes with high power consumption. For example, the power consumption of collecting environmental sounds is extremely high. In this way, the mobile phone can perform targeted processing processes with high power consumption, thereby greatly reducing the power consumption of the mobile phone.
下面分别以预设环境参数是光线强度、Wi-Fi连接情况和Wi-Fi列表为例来说明***测其所处环境的预设环境参数是否发生预设变化的具体实现。The following takes the preset environmental parameters of light intensity, Wi-Fi connection status and Wi-Fi list as examples to illustrate the specific implementation of whether the preset environmental parameters of the mobile phone monitor its environment.
在一些实施例中，预设环境参数包括光线强度。手机可监测光线强度的变化值(通常指绝对值，如增加值或者减少值)是否超过预设值。若光线强度的变化值超过预设值，则手机所在环境的光线强度发生了预设变化。也就是说，手机所处环境的光线强度由第一强度值变化为第二强度值，并且第一强度值和第二强度值的差值的绝对值超过预设值，则可初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求。In some embodiments, the preset environmental parameters include light intensity. The mobile phone can monitor whether the change value of the light intensity (usually refers to an absolute value, such as an increase value or a decrease value) exceeds a preset value. If the change value of the light intensity exceeds the preset value, the light intensity of the environment where the mobile phone is located has undergone a preset change. That is to say, if the light intensity of the environment where the mobile phone is located changes from the first intensity value to the second intensity value, and the absolute value of the difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds the preset value, it can be preliminarily determined that the user exists. The need to switch sound modes.
示例性的，若光线强度的减少值超过了预设值，用户可能从较亮的户外环境来到了较暗的室内环境。通常来说，室外比较嘈杂，室内比较安静，在该情况下，可能存在从响铃模式切换到静音模式或者震动模式的需求。Exemplarily, if the reduction value of the light intensity exceeds a preset value, the user may come from a brighter outdoor environment to a darker indoor environment. Generally speaking, it is noisy outdoors and quiet indoors. In this case, there may be a need to switch from ring mode to silent mode or vibration mode.
反之，若光线强度的变化值未超过预设值，则手机所在环境的光线强度未发生预设变化。此时通常不存在切换声音模式的需求。Conversely, if the change value of the light intensity does not exceed the preset value, then the light intensity of the environment where the mobile phone is located does not undergo a preset change. There is usually no need to switch sound modes at this point.
上述光线强度可以由手机中的环境光传感器采集得到。并且，由环境光传感器将采集到的光线强度发送给处理器。而后，由处理器计算最近相邻两次采集到的光线强度的差值的绝对值。若该绝对值超过预设值，则光线强度的变化值超过预设值。反之，若该绝对值未超过预设值，则光线强度的变化值未超过预设值。The foregoing light intensity may be collected by an ambient light sensor in the mobile phone. In addition, the ambient light sensor sends the collected light intensity to the processor. Then, the processor calculates the absolute value of the difference between the light intensities collected by two nearest neighbors. If the absolute value exceeds the preset value, the change value of the light intensity exceeds the preset value. On the contrary, if the absolute value does not exceed the preset value, then the change value of the light intensity does not exceed the preset value.
在一些实施例中，预设环境参数包括Wi-Fi连接情况。手机可监测预设时间1内手机是否自动与第一Wi-Fi断连和/或自动与第二Wi-Fi建立连接。其中，第一Wi-Fi和第二Wi-Fi可以是任一Wi-Fi。若预设时间1内手机自动与第一Wi-Fi断连和/或自动与第二Wi-Fi建立连接，则手机所在环境的Wi-Fi连接情况发生了预设变化。也就是说，手机从与第一Wi-Fi处于连接状态变化到与第一Wi-Fi断开连接，或者，手机从与第二Wi-Fi处于断开状态变化到与第二Wi-Fi连接，则可初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求。In some embodiments, the preset environmental parameters include Wi-Fi connection conditions. The mobile phone can monitor whether the mobile phone is automatically disconnected from the first Wi-Fi and/or automatically establishes a connection with the second Wi-Fi within a preset time 1. Wherein, the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi may be any Wi-Fi. If the mobile phone automatically disconnects from the first Wi-Fi and/or automatically establishes a connection with the second Wi-Fi within the preset time 1, the Wi-Fi connection situation of the environment where the mobile phone is located has undergone a preset change. That is to say, the mobile phone changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or the mobile phone changes from being disconnected from the second Wi-Fi to being connected to the second Wi-Fi , it can be preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode.
示例性的，若预设时间1内手机自动与某Wi-Fi断连了，则用户可能从室内环境来到了室外环境。该情况下，可能存在静音模式或者震动模式切换到响铃模式的需求。Exemplarily, if the mobile phone is automatically disconnected from a certain Wi-Fi within the preset time 1, the user may come from an indoor environment to an outdoor environment. In this case, there may be a need to switch from the silent mode or the vibration mode to the ring mode.
反之，若预设时间1内手机未自动与第一Wi-Fi断连和/或未自动与第二Wi-Fi建立连接，则手机所在环境的Wi-Fi连接情况未发生预设变化。此时通常不存在切换声音模式的需求。Conversely, if the mobile phone is not automatically disconnected from the first Wi-Fi and/or not automatically established to the second Wi-Fi within the preset time 1, the Wi-Fi connection status of the environment where the mobile phone is located has not changed by default. There is usually no need to switch sound modes at this point.
在一些实施例中，预设环境参数包括Wi-Fi列表。当手机扫描到的Wi-Fi列表发生变化时，即存在至少一个不同的Wi-Fi时，则手机所在环境的Wi-Fi列表发生了预设变化。也就是说，手机扫描到的Wi-Fi列表由第一Wi-Fi列表变化为第二Wi-Fi列表，第一Wi-Fi列表和第二Wi-Fi列表存在至少一个不同的Wi-Fi，则可初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求。In some embodiments, the preset environment parameters include a Wi-Fi list. When the Wi-Fi list scanned by the mobile phone changes, that is, when there is at least one different Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi list of the environment where the mobile phone is located has undergone a preset change. That is to say, the Wi-Fi list scanned by the mobile phone changes from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and there is at least one different Wi-Fi in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list, Then it can be preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode.
前述S301中，以手机所处环境的预设环境参数来监测是否存在切换声音模式的需求。而在实际中，若手机处于静音模式或者震动模式，则可能会漏接的电话。该情况下，则可能存在将声音模式切换为响铃模式的需求。In the aforementioned S301, the preset environmental parameters of the environment where the mobile phone is located are used to monitor whether there is a demand for switching sound modes. In practice, if the mobile phone is in silent mode or vibrating mode, the phone may be missed. In this case, there may be a need to switch the sound mode to the ring mode.
基于此，在另一些实施例中，如图4所示，手机可通过S401来监测是否可能存在切换声音模式的需求。Based on this, in some other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 4 , the mobile phone may monitor whether there may be a need to switch sound modes through S401 .
S401、***测是否存在漏接的电话。若是，则执行S302；若否，则继续执行S401。S401. The mobile phone monitors whether there is a missed call. If yes, execute S302; if not, continue to execute S401.
与S301中类似，在监测到存在漏接的电话的情况下，则可初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求。该情况下，则执行S302，进一步采集信息(如状态信息、环境信息)识别用户的切换意图。反之，在监测到不存在漏接的电话的情况下，则继续执行S401，以继续 监测。Similar to S301, if a missed call is detected, it may be preliminarily determined that the user has a need to switch voice modes. In this case, S302 is executed to further collect information (such as state information and environment information) to identify the user's switching intention. On the contrary, when it is detected that there is no missed call, then continue to execute S401 to continue monitoring.
其中，该漏接的电话是用户未接听的电话。Wherein, the missed call is a call not answered by the user.
在一些实施例中，漏接的电话是用户在预设时间区间内未接听的电话。其中，预设时间区间是指除用户休息时间之外的时间区间。例如，预设时间区间是8:00-22:00，或者，预设时间是8:00-13:00和14:00-22:00。在本实施例中，在监测到在预设时间区间内存在未接听的电话的情况下，则可初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求；在监测到在预设时间区间内不存在未接听的电话的情况下，则不存在切换声音模式的需求。通常情况下，用户在休息时间内(即非预设时间区间内)可能会将手机调为静音模式，未接听电话是很正常的，并不是因为用户未及时切换声音模式而导致的，而并不能认为是用户漏接的。由此可见，采用本实施例，仅将在预设时间区间内未接听的电话视为漏接的电话，可以提高监测结果的合理性。In some embodiments, a missed call is a call that the user does not answer within a preset time interval. Wherein, the preset time interval refers to a time interval except the user's rest time. For example, the preset time interval is 8:00-22:00, or, the preset time is 8:00-13:00 and 14:00-22:00. In this embodiment, if it is detected that there are unanswered calls within the preset time interval, it can be preliminarily determined that the user has a need to switch voice modes; In the case of a phone, there is no need to switch sound modes. Under normal circumstances, the user may switch the mobile phone to silent mode during the rest period (that is, within the non-preset time interval). It is normal for the user to miss the call. It cannot be considered as a missed connection by the user. It can be seen that, by using this embodiment, only calls not answered within the preset time interval are considered as missed calls, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
在一些实施例中，漏接的电话是用户在预设时间2(又可以称为第一预设时间)内未接听的电话。其中，预设时间2是距离当前时间较近的一段时间。例如，预设时间2是最近1小时、半小时、5分钟等。在本实施例中，在监测到在预设时间2内存在未接通的电话的情况下，则可初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求；在监测到在预设时间2内不存在未接听的电话的情况下，则不存在切换声音模式的需求。通常情况下，在距离当前时间较远的时间内未接听的电话难以表征当前的切换需求。由此可见，采用本实施例，仅将在预设时间2内未接听的电话视为漏接的电话，可以提高监测结果的合理性。In some embodiments, a missed call is a call that the user does not answer within the preset time 2 (also referred to as the first preset time). Wherein, the preset time 2 is a period of time that is relatively close to the current time. For example, the preset time 2 is the latest 1 hour, half an hour, 5 minutes and so on. In this embodiment, if it is detected that there is an unanswered call within the preset time 2, it can be preliminarily determined that the user has a need to switch the sound mode; In the case of a phone, there is no need to switch the sound mode. Typically, calls that are not answered for a long time from the current time are difficult to characterize the current handoff needs. It can be seen that, by adopting this embodiment, only calls not answered within the preset time 2 are regarded as missed calls, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
在一些实施例中，漏接的电话是用户未接听的预设电话，其中，预设电话是除骚扰电话和/或黑名单之外的电话。在本实施例中，手机在监测到未接听的电话1后，手机可进一步监测该电话1是否为预设电话。具体的，手机可监测电话1是否为骚扰电话，若该电话1是骚扰电话，则该电话1不是预设电话；若该电话1不是骚扰电话，则该电话1是预设电话。其中，骚扰电话是指被标记有骚扰标识的电话。和/或，手机可将该电话1与黑名单中的电话相匹配，若该黑名单的号码中包括该电话1，则该电话1不是预设电话；若该黑名单中不包括该电话1，则该电话1是预设电话。也就是说，漏接的电话不包括被标记骚扰标识的电话和/或所述黑名单中的电话。并且，在监测到该电话1是预设电话的情况下，则可初步确定用户存在切换声音模式的需求；在监测到该电话1不是预设电话的情况下，则不存在切换声音模式的需求。通常情况下，黑名单中的电话会被自动拦截，而且黑名单中的电话都是用户不愿意接听的电话；以及，骚扰电话也是用户不愿意接听的电话。因此，对于骚扰电话和/或黑名单中的电话，用户未接听并不意味是漏接。由此可见，采用本实施例，仅将用户未接听的预设电话视为漏接的电话，可以提高监测结果的合理性。In some embodiments, the missed call is a preset call not answered by the user, wherein the preset call is a call other than harassing calls and/or blacklisted calls. In this embodiment, after the mobile phone detects an unanswered call 1, the mobile phone can further monitor whether the phone 1 is a preset call. Specifically, the mobile phone can monitor whether the phone 1 is a harassing call, if the phone 1 is a harassing call, then the phone 1 is not the preset call; if the phone 1 is not a harassing call, then the phone 1 is the default call. Wherein, the harassing call refers to a phone marked with a harassing logo. And/or, the mobile phone can match the phone 1 with the phone in the blacklist, if the phone 1 is included in the number of the blacklist, then the phone 1 is not a preset phone; if the phone 1 is not included in the blacklist , then phone 1 is the default phone. That is to say, the missed calls do not include the calls marked as harassment and/or the calls in the blacklist. And, when it is detected that the phone 1 is a default phone, it can be preliminarily determined that the user has a need to switch voice modes; when it is detected that the phone 1 is not a default phone, there is no need to switch voice modes . Usually, the calls in the blacklist will be automatically blocked, and the calls in the blacklist are calls that the user is unwilling to answer; and harassing calls are also calls that the user is unwilling to answer. Therefore, for harassing calls and/or calls in the blacklist, if the user does not answer, it does not mean that the call is missed. It can be seen that, by adopting this embodiment, only the preset calls not answered by the user are regarded as missed calls, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
其中，漏接的电话可以是一个或者多个。在一些实施例中，手机可监测是否存在超过预设数量1的漏接的电话。例如，预设数量1为5次，3次等。若存在超过预设数量的漏接的电话，则更有可能是因为未及时切换声音模式而导致漏接的电话。这种情况下，则更有可能存在切换声音模式的需求。若不存在超过预设数量1的漏接的电话，则可能是因为其它原因而导致未接电话。例如，在会议中而不方便接电话。这种情况下，则通常不存在切换声音模式的需求。由此可见，在本实施例中，仅在漏接的电话超过预设数量时才认为存在切换需求，可以提高监测结果的合理性。Wherein, there may be one or more missed calls. In some embodiments, the handset can monitor whether there are more than a preset number of missed calls. For example, the preset quantity 1 is 5 times, 3 times and so on. If there are more than a preset number of missed calls, it is more likely that the missed calls were caused by not switching the sound mode in time. In this case, it is more likely that there is a need to switch the sound mode. If there are no missed calls exceeding the preset number 1, the missed calls may be caused by other reasons. For example, it is not convenient to answer the phone in a meeting. In this case, there is usually no need to switch sound modes. It can be seen that, in this embodiment, only when the number of missed calls exceeds the preset number, it is considered that there is a switching requirement, which can improve the rationality of the monitoring results.
应注意，虽然前文中分别单独以手机所在环境的预设环境参数和漏接的电话来说明了 监测是否存在切换声音模式的需求的具体实现。在一些实施例中，也可以将上述两种方式结合，结合的方式具体如下：在开始执行本申请方案的时间段1内，采用S401的方式来监测用户是否存在切换声音模式的需求，以实现在漏接的电话的情况下进一步识别切换意图、推送切换提示并获取用户对切换提示的操作。在该时间段1内，手机则可以学习到漏接的电话时的特征(例如，状态、环境等特征)和真实的需求。在时间段1之后，可以采用S301的方式来监测用户是否存在切换声音模式的需求，从而可以在出现漏接的电话之前识别出切换意图并及时的推送切换提示，避免漏接的电话。It should be noted that although the preset environmental parameters of the environment where the mobile phone is located and the missed calls have been used to illustrate the specific implementation of monitoring whether there is a need to switch sound modes. In some embodiments, the above two methods can also be combined, and the combination method is specifically as follows: within the time period 1 when the solution of this application is started, the method of S401 is used to monitor whether the user has a need to switch the sound mode, so as to realize In the case of a missed call, further identify the switching intention, push the switching prompt and obtain the user's operation on the switching prompt. During the time period 1, the mobile phone can learn the features (for example, status, environment, etc.) and real needs of the missed call. After time period 1, the method of S301 can be used to monitor whether the user has the need to switch the voice mode, so that the switching intention can be identified before the missed call occurs and the switching prompt can be pushed in time to avoid the missed call.
应注意，在前述S301和S401中，详细说明了以预设环境参数和漏接的电话作为触发下述S302的触发条件的具体实现。但是，在实际实施时，手机也可以周期性的或者定时的执行下述S302，而无需通过S301或者S401来触发。It should be noted that in the aforementioned S301 and S401, the specific implementation of using preset environmental parameters and a missed call as trigger conditions for triggering the following S302 is described in detail. However, in actual implementation, the mobile phone may also periodically or periodically execute the following S302 without triggering through S301 or S401.
S302、手机获取状态信息和环境信息。其中，状态信息包括手机当前采用的声音模式，环境信息包括环境音。S302. The mobile phone acquires status information and environment information. Wherein, the state information includes the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone, and the environment information includes the environment sound.
在本申请实施例中，在初步确定出用户存在切换声音模式的需求的情况下，才获取状态信息和环境信息，以供进一步识别切换意图。如此，可以极大的降低手机功耗。In the embodiment of the present application, the state information and environment information are acquired only after it is preliminarily determined that the user needs to switch the sound mode, so as to further identify the switching intention. In this way, the power consumption of the mobile phone can be greatly reduced.
其中，状态信息用于指示手机当前的声音模式、使用情况和/或与其他设备的连接情况等状态。Wherein, the status information is used to indicate the status of the mobile phone's current sound mode, usage and/or connection with other devices.
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括手机当前采用的声音模式1。声音模式1不同，则存在的切换意图可能不同。例如，声音模式1是静音模式，则可能存在切换到响铃模式的切换意图(记为切换意图1)。又如，声音模式1是响铃模式，则可能存在切换到静音模式或者震动模式的切换意图。In some embodiments, the status information includes the sound mode 1 currently used by the mobile phone. If the sound mode 1 is different, there may be different switching intentions. For example, if the sound mode 1 is a silent mode, there may be a switching intention to switch to the ringing mode (denoted as switching intention 1). For another example, if the sound mode 1 is a ring mode, there may be a switching intention to switch to a silent mode or a vibration mode.
在一些实施例中，状态信息可以包括手机是否连接可穿戴设备的指示信息(也可以称为第一指示信息)。其中，可穿戴设备可以是智能手表、手环、耳机、智能眼镜等设备中的至少一个。具体的，手机可查询手机连接的蓝牙外设，若蓝牙外设中包括上述可穿戴设备(智能手表、手环和/或无线耳机)，则可感知到手机连接到上述可穿戴设备。手机还可以通过检测手机的耳机接口(如图2中的耳机接口270D)来感知手机是否连接有线耳机。例如，耳机接口有音频输入或者输出，则手机连接了有线耳机。In some embodiments, the status information may include indication information (also referred to as first indication information) whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device. Wherein, the wearable device may be at least one of smart watches, bracelets, earphones, smart glasses and other devices. Specifically, the mobile phone can query the Bluetooth peripherals connected to the mobile phone. If the Bluetooth peripherals include the above-mentioned wearable devices (smart watch, bracelet and/or wireless earphone), it can sense that the mobile phone is connected to the above-mentioned wearable device. The mobile phone can also sense whether the mobile phone is connected to a wired earphone by detecting the earphone jack of the mobile phone (such as the earphone jack 270D in FIG. 2 ). For example, if the earphone interface has audio input or output, the mobile phone is connected with a wired earphone.
进一步的，状态信息还包括上述可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息(也可以称为第二指示信息)。具体的，手机可检测智能手表和/或手环是否采集到用户的生理特征，如心率、血压等。若智能手表和/或手环可采集到用户的生理特征，即感知到智能手表和/或手环佩戴在用户身上。或者，手机还可检测无线耳机是否佩戴在耳朵里。若检测到无线耳机佩戴在耳朵里，即感知无线耳机佩戴在用户身上。Further, the status information also includes indication information (also referred to as second indication information) whether the above-mentioned wearable device is worn on the user. Specifically, the mobile phone can detect whether the smart watch and/or wristband have collected the user's physiological characteristics, such as heart rate and blood pressure. If the smart watch and/or bracelet can collect the physiological characteristics of the user, it is perceived that the smart watch and/or bracelet are worn on the user. Alternatively, the phone can also detect whether the wireless headset is worn in the ear. If it is detected that the wireless headset is worn in the ear, it is sensed that the wireless headset is worn on the user.
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括用户是否正在使用手机的指示信息(也可以称为第三指示信息)。其中，用户是否正在使用手机也可以理解为手机是否正处于使用状态。In some embodiments, the status information includes indication information (also referred to as third indication information) whether the user is using the mobile phone. Wherein, whether the user is using the mobile phone can also be understood as whether the mobile phone is in use.
在一种具体的实现方式中，手机可检测用户是否在注视手机屏幕。其中，可采用注视感知技术来检测用户是否在注视手机屏幕。注视感知技术是通过前置摄像头追踪瞳孔朝向从而检测出用户是否在注视手机屏幕。若检测出用户在注视手机屏幕，则相当于感知到用户正在使用手机。也就是说，用户正在使用手机，包括：手机检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视手机的屏幕。In a specific implementation manner, the mobile phone can detect whether the user is looking at the screen of the mobile phone. Among them, gaze perception technology can be used to detect whether the user is looking at the screen of the mobile phone. Gaze perception technology uses the front camera to track the direction of the pupils to detect whether the user is looking at the phone screen. If it is detected that the user is looking at the screen of the mobile phone, it is equivalent to sensing that the user is using the mobile phone. That is, the user is using the mobile phone, including: the mobile phone detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the mobile phone.
在另一种具体的实现方式中，手机可检测预设时间3内是否接收到用户对手机屏幕的 触控操作。其中，预设时间3可以是1分钟、30秒、5秒等。若检测到预设时间3内接收到用户对手机屏幕的触控操作，则相当于感知到用户正在使用手机。也就是说，用户正在使用手机，包括：手机检测到用户对手机的屏幕的触控操作。In another specific implementation, the mobile phone can detect whether a user's touch operation on the mobile phone screen is received within a preset time 3. Wherein, the preset time 3 may be 1 minute, 30 seconds, 5 seconds and so on. If it is detected that the user's touch operation on the mobile phone screen is received within the preset time 3, it is equivalent to sensing that the user is using the mobile phone. That is to say, the user is using the mobile phone, including: the mobile phone detects the user's touch operation on the screen of the mobile phone.
在另一种具体的实现方式中，手机可以根据环境光和/或加速度检测用户是否正在使用手机。具体的，手机可通过环境光传感器检测环境光的光线强度，以及手机可通过加速度传感器检测手机的加速度。若光线强度低于强度值1(也可以称为第一预设强度)，则感知到手机被放置在用户随身携带的包或者衣服口袋等光线较暗的位置处，而未拿在手上。或者，若加速度大于预设加速度1(也可以称为预设加速度)，则感知到手机可能随着用户步行或者跑步的运动而运动，此时也通常不会使用手机。也就是说，用户正在使用手机，包括：手机检测到环境的光线强度大于第一预设强度，且手机的加速度小于预设加速度。In another specific implementation manner, the mobile phone may detect whether the user is using the mobile phone according to ambient light and/or acceleration. Specifically, the mobile phone can detect the light intensity of the ambient light through the ambient light sensor, and the mobile phone can detect the acceleration of the mobile phone through the acceleration sensor. If the light intensity is lower than the intensity value 1 (also referred to as the first preset intensity), it is perceived that the mobile phone is placed in a darker location such as the user's carry-on bag or clothes pocket, but not in the hand. Or, if the acceleration is greater than the preset acceleration 1 (also referred to as the preset acceleration), it is perceived that the mobile phone may move with the user walking or running, and the mobile phone is usually not used at this time. That is to say, the user is using the mobile phone, including: the mobile phone detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than the first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the mobile phone is less than the preset acceleration.
应注意，上述具体的实现方式中用户正在使用手机的情况都是示例性的，实际实施时，可以将多者结合，或者还可以包括其他情况。例如，用户正在使用手机也可以包括手机处于亮屏状态。It should be noted that the situation that the user is using the mobile phone in the above specific implementation manners is exemplary, and in actual implementation, multiple methods may be combined, or other situations may also be included. For example, the fact that the user is using a mobile phone may also include that the mobile phone is in a bright screen state.
其中，环境信息用于指示手机所处的环境，例如，环境音和/或环境场所。Wherein, the environment information is used to indicate the environment of the mobile phone, for example, the environment sound and/or the environment location.
在一些实施例中，环境信息包括环境音。具体的，手机可开启麦克风(如图2中的麦克风270C)采集手机当前所处环境的环境音。需要再次强调的是，采集环境音的过程，功耗特别大。若长期采集环境音量，则会导致手机发热、续航能力差等问题。采用本申请实施例，在监测出用户可能存在切换声音模式的需求的情况下，才开启麦克风采集环境音。例如，在监测到光线强度发生较大变化后，才开启麦克风采集。又如，在监测到有漏接的电话后，才开启麦克风采集。如此，可以极大的降低手机功耗。从而实现低功耗声音采集。In some embodiments, the ambient information includes ambient sounds. Specifically, the mobile phone can turn on a microphone (such as the microphone 270C in FIG. 2 ) to collect the ambient sound of the environment where the mobile phone is currently located. It needs to be emphasized again that the process of collecting ambient sound consumes a lot of power. If the ambient volume is collected for a long time, it will cause problems such as heating of the mobile phone and poor battery life. With the embodiment of the present application, the microphone is turned on to collect ambient sound only when it is detected that the user may have a need to switch the sound mode. For example, the microphone acquisition is not turned on until a large change in light intensity is detected. For another example, the microphone acquisition is started only after a missed call is detected. In this way, the power consumption of the mobile phone can be greatly reduced. Thereby realizing low-power sound collection.
在本申请实施例中，上述采集的环境音可以存储在可信执行环境(Trusted Execution Environment，TEE)中。TEE表示一个与***级芯片(System on Chip，SoC)中其他模块隔离的区域。普通应用程序(除可信应用程序)无法从该区域中获取数据。如此，将环境音存储于TEE中，可以避免用户的隐私数据丢失。从而保证用户隐私数据的安全性。In the embodiment of the present application, the collected ambient sound may be stored in a trusted execution environment (Trusted Execution Environment, TEE). TEE represents an area isolated from other modules in a System on Chip (SoC). Ordinary applications (except trusted applications) cannot obtain data from this zone. In this way, storing the ambient sound in the TEE can avoid the loss of the user's private data. This ensures the security of user privacy data.
另外，在TEE中可仅存储最近一次采集的环境音，以节省存储资源。或者，也可存储多次采集的环境音，可以更清楚的反映手机所在环境的环境音的变化情况。从而便于后续识别切换意图。In addition, only the latest collected ambient sound can be stored in the TEE to save storage resources. Alternatively, the ambient sound collected multiple times can also be stored, which can more clearly reflect changes in the ambient sound of the environment where the mobile phone is located. This facilitates subsequent recognition of the handover intention.
在另一些实施例中，环境信息包括手机所处的环境场所(也可以称为环境类型)。具体的，手机可以识别手机当前所处的环境场所。例如，该环境场所可以是会议室、办公室、医院、餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、电影院、游乐场和商场中的多种等。In some other embodiments, the environment information includes the environment location (also called environment type) where the mobile phone is located. Specifically, the mobile phone can identify the current environment where the mobile phone is located. For example, the environmental place may be a conference room, an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a carriage, a roadside, a plaza, a movie theater, an amusement park, and a shopping mall.
示例性的，手机可利用人工智能(Artificial Intelligence，AI)识别模型(如低功耗视觉感知模型)识别出手机当前所处的环境场所。其中，该AI识别模型具有根据环境音和/或环境图像识别手机当前所处的环境场所的功能。在训练过程中，可以将历史采集的手机所处环境的环境音和/或摄像头采集的未加工图像(RAW图像)作为输入样本，以及将标注的环境场所作为输出样本。利用该输入样本和输出样本则可训练得到AI识别模型。而后，在识别过程中，可以将当前采集的环境音和/或RAW图像输入至AI识别模型，AI识别模型则可识别得到手机当前所处的环境场所。Exemplarily, the mobile phone can use an artificial intelligence (Artificial Intelligence, AI) recognition model (such as a low-power visual perception model) to identify the current environment where the mobile phone is located. Wherein, the AI identification model has the function of identifying the current environmental location of the mobile phone according to the environmental sound and/or environmental image. During the training process, the ambient sound of the environment where the mobile phone is located in history and/or the unprocessed image (RAW image) collected by the camera can be used as an input sample, and the marked environmental place can be used as an output sample. Using the input samples and output samples, an AI recognition model can be trained. Then, in the recognition process, the currently collected ambient sound and/or RAW image can be input to the AI recognition model, and the AI recognition model can recognize the current environmental location of the mobile phone.
S303、手机检测该状态信息和环境信息是否满足预设条件1。若是，则执行S304；若否，则重复执行S301或者S401。S303. The mobile phone detects whether the state information and the environment information satisfy preset condition 1. If yes, execute S304; if not, execute S301 or S401 repeatedly.
其中，预设条件1又可以称为第一预设条件。Wherein, the preset condition 1 may also be referred to as the first preset condition.
其中，若手机检测到该状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1，则表明满足从静音模式或者震动模式切换至响铃模式的条件。该情况下存在从静音模式或者震动模式切换至响铃模式的切换意图(即切换意图1)。反之，若手机检测到该状态信息和环境信息不满足预设条件1，则表明不满足从静音模式或者震动模式切换至响铃模式的条件。该情况下不存在切换意图1。Wherein, if the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, it indicates that the condition for switching from the silent mode or the vibration mode to the ringing mode is met. In this case, there is a switching intention (that is, switching intention 1) to switch from the silent mode or the vibrating mode to the ringing mode. On the contrary, if the mobile phone detects that the status information and environment information do not meet the preset condition 1, it indicates that the condition for switching from the silent mode or the vibration mode to the ring mode is not met. In this case, handover intent 1 does not exist.
下文中，将针对前文中列举的状态信息和环境信息，来说明检测该状态信息和环境信息是否满足预设条件1的具体实现。Hereinafter, specific implementation of detecting whether the state information and environment information satisfy the preset condition 1 will be described with respect to the state information and environment information listed above.
第一方面，针对状态信息的检测。The first aspect is for the detection of state information.
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括手机当前采用的声音模式1。相应的，手机可检测该声音模式1是否为震动模式或者静音模式。若该声音模式1是震动模式或者静音模式，该状态信息满足预设条件1，此时存在切换意图1。反之，若该声音模式1是响铃模式，该状态信息不满足预设条件1，此时不存在切换意图1。如此，手机可以将未及时切换到响铃模式的情况识别为存在切换意图1的情况。也就是说，场景1的前提应该是手机当前采用的声音模式为静音模式或者震动模式。在声音模式为静音模式或者震动模式的情况下，才需要进一步去检测其它状态信息和环境信息。In some embodiments, the status information includes the sound mode 1 currently used by the mobile phone. Correspondingly, the mobile phone can detect whether the sound mode 1 is a vibration mode or a silent mode. If the sound mode 1 is a vibration mode or a silent mode, the state information satisfies the preset condition 1, and there is a switch intention 1 at this time. On the contrary, if the sound mode 1 is a ringing mode, the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 1, and there is no switching intention 1 at this time. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that the situation of not switching to the ring mode in time is the situation of switching intention 1. That is to say, the premise of scenario 1 should be that the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone is silent mode or vibration mode. When the sound mode is a silent mode or a vibration mode, it is necessary to further detect other status information and environmental information.
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括手机是否连接可穿戴设备的指示信息。相应的，若手机是否连接可穿戴设备的指示信息为指示信息1，则状态信息不满足预设条件1。其中，指示信息1用于指示手机连接了可穿戴设备。若手机连接了可穿戴设备，手机可利用可穿戴设备来提示来电或者通知消息等。从而无需通过响铃来提示，此时不存在切换意图1。反之，若手机是否连接可穿戴设备的指示信息为指示信息2，则状态信息满足预设条件1。其中，指示信息2用于指示手机未连接可穿戴设备。若手机未连接可穿戴设备，则通常需要通过手机响铃来提示来电或者通知消息等，此时存在切换意图1。如此，手机可以来电或者通知消息等无法通过可穿戴设备来提示的情况识别为存在切换意图1的情况。In some embodiments, the state information includes indication information whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device. Correspondingly, if the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 1, the status information does not satisfy the preset condition 1. Wherein, the indication information 1 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is connected with a wearable device, the mobile phone can use the wearable device to prompt incoming calls or notification messages. Therefore, there is no need to prompt by ringing the bell, and there is no switching intention 1 at this time. Conversely, if the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 2, the state information satisfies the preset condition 1. Wherein, the indication information 2 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device, it is usually necessary to ring the mobile phone to prompt the incoming call or notification message, etc. At this time, there is switching intention 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that there is a switching intention 1 when there is an incoming call or a notification message that cannot be prompted by the wearable device.
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息。相应的，若可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息为指示信息3，则状态信息不满足预设条件1。其中，指示信息3用于指示可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上。若可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上，则用户可以很容易从上述可穿戴设备中查看到来电或者通知消息的提示。从而无需通过手机响铃来提示，此时不存在切换意图1。反之，若可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息为指示信息4，则状态信息满足预设条件1。其中，指示信息4用于指示可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上。若可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上，则即使通过上述可穿戴设备提示了来电或者通知消息等，用户也可能无法查看到，从而也需要通过响铃来提示，此时存在切换意图1。如此，手机可以将用户无法通过其它途径获取来电或者通知消息等提示的情况识别为存在切换意图1的情况。In some embodiments, the status information includes information indicating whether the wearable device is worn by the user. Correspondingly, if the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 3, the status information does not satisfy the preset condition 1. Wherein, the indication information 3 is used to indicate that the wearable device is worn on the user. If the wearable device is worn on the user, the user can easily view the prompt of the incoming call or notification message from the wearable device. Therefore, there is no need to prompt by ringing the mobile phone, and there is no switching intention 1 at this time. Conversely, if the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 4, the state information satisfies the preset condition 1. Wherein, the indication information 4 is used to indicate that the wearable device is not worn on the user. If the wearable device is not worn by the user, the user may not be able to view it even if the wearable device prompts an incoming call or notification message, and thus needs to be prompted by ringing the bell. At this time, there is switching intention 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the fact that the user cannot obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages through other means as the fact that there is a handover intention 1 .
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括用户是否正在使用手机的指示信息。相应的，若用户是否正在使用手机的指示信息为指示信息5，则状态信息不满足预设条件1。其中，指示信息5用于指示用户正在使用手机。一方面，若用户正在使用手机，则当用户存在切换声音模式的需求时会及时切换。例如，用户想要切换到响铃模式，则会在手机上及时操作切换，通常不会存在有切换意图1而未切换的情况。另一方面，若用户正在使用手机，则用 户可及时发现来电或者通知消息等提示，也无需通过响铃提示。综上两方面，若用户正在使用手机，则不存在切换意图1。反之，若用户是否正在使用手机的指示信息为指示信息6，则状态信息满足预设条件1。其中，指示信息6用于指示用户未在使用手机。若用户未在使用手机，则可能无法及时切换到响铃模式，可能存在切换意图1。如此，手机可以将用户无法及时切换到响铃模式的情况识别为存在切换意图1的情况。In some embodiments, the status information includes an indication of whether the user is using the cell phone. Correspondingly, if the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is indication information 5, the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 1. Wherein, the indication information 5 is used to indicate that the user is using the mobile phone. On the one hand, if the user is using a mobile phone, it will switch in time when the user needs to switch the sound mode. For example, if the user wants to switch to the ring mode, he will operate the switch in time on the mobile phone. Usually, there will be no situation where there is a switch intention 1 but the switch is not made. On the other hand, if the user is using a mobile phone, the user can find prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages in time, and there is no need to prompt by ringing. To sum up the above two aspects, if the user is using a mobile phone, there is no switching intention 1. On the contrary, if the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is the indication information 6, then the state information satisfies the preset condition 1. Wherein, the indication information 6 is used to indicate that the user is not using the mobile phone. If the user is not using the mobile phone, it may not be able to switch to the ring mode in time, and there may be a switching intention 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the situation that the user cannot switch to the ring mode in time as the situation that switching intention 1 exists.
第二方面，针对环境信息的检测。The second aspect is for the detection of environmental information.
在一些实施例中，环境信息包括手机所处环境的环境音。具体的，该环境音是最近一次采集的环境音，即当前环境的环境音(记为环境音1)。相应的，手机可获取该环境音1(如从TEE中获取)，检测该环境音1是否超过预设分贝值1(也可以称为第一分贝)。若检测到环境音1超过预设分贝值1，则环境信息满足预设条件1。一般而言，环境音在60分贝以上，则环境比较嘈杂，预设分贝值1可以是大于或等于60分贝的值。例如，预设分贝值1是60分贝，80分贝等。环境音1超过预设分贝值1，则用户可能无法感受到手机震动，也有可能因环境嘈杂而未关注到来电提示(如亮屏提示)。该情况下，可能存在切换意图1。反之，若检测到环境音1未超过预设分贝值1，则环境信息不满足预设条件1。环境音1未超过预设分贝值1，则所处环境相对安静，手机响铃可能会影响周围的人。该情况下，通常不存在切换意图1。如此，手机可以将环境嘈杂的情况识别为存在切换意图1的情况。In some embodiments, the environmental information includes environmental sounds of the environment where the mobile phone is located. Specifically, the environmental sound is the latest collected environmental sound, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (denoted as environmental sound 1). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can acquire the environmental sound 1 (for example, from the TEE), and detect whether the environmental sound 1 exceeds a preset decibel value 1 (also referred to as the first decibel). If the detected environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1. Generally speaking, if the ambient sound is above 60 decibels, the environment is relatively noisy, and the preset decibel value 1 may be greater than or equal to 60 decibels. For example, the preset decibel value 1 is 60 decibels, 80 decibels, etc. If the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, the user may not be able to feel the vibration of the mobile phone, or may not pay attention to the incoming call reminder (such as a bright screen reminder) due to the noisy environment. In this case, Handover Intent 1 may exist. On the contrary, if the detected environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 1 . If the ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, the environment is relatively quiet, and the ringing of the mobile phone may affect the surrounding people. In this case, handover intent 1 usually does not exist. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the noisy environment as the handover intention 1 .
或者，该环境音可以是最近至少两次采集的环境音，即当前环境的环境音(环境音1)和历史环境的至少一个环境音(记为环境音2)。相应的，手机可获取环境音1和环境音2(如从TEE中获取)，并检测该环境音1是否超过预设分贝值1，以及检测该环境音2是否超过预设分贝值2。其中，预设分贝值2小于或等于预设分贝值1。Alternatively, the environmental sound may be at least two recently collected environmental sounds, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (environmental sound 1) and at least one environmental sound of the historical environment (marked as environmental sound 2). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can obtain the environmental sound 1 and the environmental sound 2 (such as obtained from TEE), and detect whether the environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, and detect whether the environmental sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 2. Wherein, the preset decibel value 2 is less than or equal to the preset decibel value 1 .
若检测到该环境音1超过预设分贝值1，以及检测到该环境音2未超过预设分贝值2，则环境信息满足预设条件1。环境音2未超过预设分贝值2，表明历史环境为相对安静的环境，环境音1超过预设分贝值1，表明当前环境为较嘈杂的环境。也就是说，手机从安静的环境移动到嘈杂的环境。该情况下，用户极有可能未及时切换声音模式，从而可能导致漏接电话，此时存在切换意图1。应注意，预设分贝值2小于预设分贝值1，可以避免因环境音的采集误差而导致对切换意图的识别误差。例如，预设分贝值1等于70分贝，预设分贝值2等于50分贝，则在环境因1高于环境音2至少20分贝的情况下，才会识别为有切换意图1。If the detected environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1 and the detected environmental sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 . The ambient sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, indicating that the historical environment is a relatively quiet environment, and the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, indicating that the current environment is a relatively noisy environment. That is, the phone moves from a quiet environment to a noisy environment. In this case, it is very likely that the user did not switch the sound mode in time, which may result in missed calls, and there is switching intention 1 at this time. It should be noted that the preset decibel value 2 is smaller than the preset decibel value 1, which can avoid the recognition error of the switching intention caused by the collection error of the ambient sound. For example, if the preset decibel value 1 is equal to 70 decibels, and the preset decibel value 2 is equal to 50 decibels, then only when the environmental cause 1 is at least 20 decibels higher than the environmental sound 2, the switching intention 1 will be recognized.
也就是说，若环境音由第一音量范围上升至第二音量范围，则环境信息满足预设条件1。其中，第一音量范围的最大值小于第二音量范围的最小值。That is to say, if the ambient sound rises from the first volume range to the second volume range, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 . Wherein, the maximum value of the first volume range is smaller than the minimum value of the second volume range.
反之，若检测到该环境音1未超过预设分贝值1，和/或检测到该环境音2超过预设分贝值2，则环境信息满足预设条件1。环境音1未超过预设分贝值1，和/或环境音2超过预设分贝值2，则表明手机未从安静的环境移动到嘈杂的环境。该情况下，通常不存在切换意图1。On the contrary, if the detected environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, and/or the detected environmental sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1. The ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, and/or the ambient sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, indicating that the mobile phone has not moved from a quiet environment to a noisy environment. In this case, handover intent 1 usually does not exist.
示例性的，预设分贝值1等于预设分贝值2。若环境音1超过预设分贝值1，且环境音2超过预设分贝值2，则表明手机一直处于嘈杂的环境。该情况下，若用户存在切换意图1，理应早已完成切换。基于此，在本实施例中，将该情况识别为不存在切换意图1的情况。Exemplarily, the preset decibel value 1 is equal to the preset decibel value 2. If the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, and the ambient sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, it indicates that the mobile phone is always in a noisy environment. In this case, if the user has switching intention 1, the switching should have already been completed. Based on this, in this embodiment, this situation is recognized as the situation that there is no handover intention 1 .
采用本实施例的检测方式，可以将手机所处环境从安静到嘈杂变化的情况识别为存在切换意图1的情况。Using the detection method of this embodiment, the situation where the environment of the mobile phone changes from quiet to noisy can be identified as the situation that there is a handover intention 1 .
在一些实施例中，环境信息包括手机所处的环境场所。具体的，该环境场所是最近一次识别出的环境场所，即当前所在的环境场所(记为环境场所1)。相应的，手机可获取该环境场所1，检测该环境场所1是否为预设环境场所(也可以称为预设类型)。其中，预设环境场所可以是路边、车厢、广场等噪音较大的环境场所。若检测到环境场所1是预设环境场所，则环境信息满足预设条件1。在预设环境场所下，用户极有可能因噪音而无法感受到震动，或者无法关注到来电提示。该情况下，用户可能存在切换意图1。反之，若检测到环境场所1不是预设环境场所(也可以称为非预设类型)，则环境信息不满足预设条件1。该情况下，通常不存在切换意图1。In some embodiments, the environmental information includes the environmental location where the mobile phone is located. Specifically, the environmental location is the latest recognized environmental location, that is, the current environmental location (denoted as environmental location 1). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can acquire the environmental place 1, and detect whether the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place (also called a preset type). Wherein, the preset environmental place may be a noisy environment place such as a roadside, a carriage, or a square. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 . In the default environment, the user may not be able to feel the vibration due to noise, or may not be able to pay attention to the incoming call reminder. In this case, the user may have switching intention 1. Conversely, if it is detected that the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place (also called a non-preset type), the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 1 . In this case, handover intent 1 usually does not exist.
应注意，环境场所的特征通常是非常明显的，而不同特征对使用响铃提示的必要性也是非常明确的。例如，路边的车辆、路人来往，噪音较大，极容易漏接电话等。并且，路边属于比较空旷的环境场所，响铃也不太容易对周围的人造成干扰。从而必要、且可以使用响铃提示。又如，飞机上的噪音也很大，与此同时，飞机上无法接听电话，即使打开响铃模式也没有意义。从而无需使用响铃提示。It should be noted that the characteristics of the environmental place are usually very obvious, and the necessity of using the ring reminder for different characteristics is also very clear. For example, vehicles and passers-by on the side of the road are noisy, and it is very easy to miss calls. Moreover, the roadside is a relatively open environment, and the ringing of the bell is not easy to cause disturbance to the surrounding people. Therefore, it is necessary and possible to use the ringing reminder. As another example, the noise on the plane is also very loud. At the same time, the phone cannot be answered on the plane, and it does not make sense to turn on the ring mode. This eliminates the need for a ringing alert.
因此，在本实施例中，通过环境场所可以准确的识别出存在切换意图1的情况。例如，若依据环境音来识别，则可能将在飞机上的情况识别为存在切换意图1的情况，这显然是不合理的。而采用本实施例的方式，则可以将环境场所为飞机上的情况识别为不存在切换意图1的情况。Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to accurately identify the presence of the handover intention 1 through the environmental location. For example, if the recognition is based on the ambient sound, the situation on the airplane may be recognized as the situation of switching intention 1, which is obviously unreasonable. However, by adopting the method of this embodiment, the situation that the environmental place is an airplane can be identified as the situation that there is no switching intention 1 .
或者，该环境场所可以是最近至少两次识别出的环境场所，即当前所在的环境场所(环境场所1)和历史所在的至少一个环境场所(记为环境场所2)。相应的，手机可获取该环境场所1和环境场所2，检测该环境场所1和环境场所2是否为预设环境场所。若检测到环境场所1是预设环境场所，环境场所2不是预设环境场所，则环境信息满足预设条件1。环境场所2不是预设环境场所，表明历史所在的环境场所是无需使用响铃提示的环境场所，环境场所2是预设环境场所，表明当前所在的环境场所是需要使用响铃提示的环境场所。也就是说，手机从无需响铃提示的环境场所移动到了需要响铃提示的环境场所。该情况下，用户可能存在切换意图1。也就是说，环境场所由非预设类型变化为预设类型，则环境信息满足预设条件1。其中，预设类型可以是餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、游乐场或者商场等噪音较大的场所。Alternatively, the environmental location may be the environmental location identified at least twice recently, that is, the current environmental location (environmental location 1) and at least one historical location (environmental location 2). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can obtain the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2, and detect whether the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2 are preset environmental places. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place and the environmental place 2 is not a preset environmental place, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1 . Environmental location 2 is not a preset environmental location, indicating that the historical environmental location is an environmental location that does not need to use a bell reminder, and environmental location 2 is a default environmental location, indicating that the current environmental location is an environmental location that requires a ringing reminder. That is to say, the mobile phone has moved from an environmental place that does not need a ringing reminder to an environmental place that requires a ringing reminder. In this case, the user may have switching intention 1. That is to say, if the environmental place changes from a non-preset type to a preset type, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 1. Wherein, the preset type may be places with relatively loud noises such as restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds, or shopping malls.
反之，若检测到环境场所1不是预设环境场所，和/或，环境场所2是预设环境场所，则环境信息不满足预设条件1。该情况下，手机并未从无需响铃提示的环境场所移动到需要响铃提示的环境场所，通常不存在切换意图1。如此，手机可以将手机从无需响铃提示的环境场所移动到需要响铃提示的环境场所的情况，识别为存在切换意图1的情况。从而可以提高识别结果的合理性。On the contrary, if it is detected that the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place, and/or the environmental place 2 is a preset environmental place, then the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 1 . In this case, the mobile phone does not move from an environmental place that does not require a ringing reminder to an environmental place that requires a ringing reminder, and there is usually no switching intention 1 . In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that there is a handover intention 1 when the mobile phone is moved from an environmental place that does not require a ringing reminder to an environmental place that requires a ringing reminder. Therefore, the rationality of the recognition result can be improved.
上述分别单独针对各种状态信息和各种环境信息来检测是否满足预设条件1的过程，即识别切换意图1的过程。在实际实施时，为了提高对切换意图1的识别的准确性，手机可以结合至少一种状态信息和至少一种环境信息来识别切换意图1，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。其中，至少一种状态信息包括声音模式1，至少一种环境信息包括环境音1和环境音2。The above-mentioned process of detecting whether the preset condition 1 is satisfied for various state information and various environmental information is the process of identifying the handover intention 1 . In actual implementation, in order to improve the accuracy of identifying the handover intention 1, the mobile phone may identify the handover intention 1 by combining at least one state information and at least one environment information, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. Wherein, at least one kind of status information includes sound mode 1 , and at least one kind of environmental information includes environmental sound 1 and environmental sound 2 .
示例一，若手机检测出声音模式1是静音模式或者震动模式，并且，环境音1超过预设分贝值1，环境音2未超过预设分贝值2，则状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1。如此，手机可以将当前未采用响铃模式，并且从安静环境移动到嘈杂环境的情况，识别为存在切换意图1的情况。Example 1, if the mobile phone detects that the sound mode 1 is silent mode or vibration mode, and the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, and the ambient sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, then the status information and environmental information meet the preset conditions 1. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the situation that the ring mode is not currently used and the mobile phone moves from a quiet environment to a noisy environment as the situation of switching intention 1 .
示例二，在各项状态信息和环境信息符合如下表1所示的情况时，才能识别为存在切换意图1。Example 2, when each item of state information and environment information conforms to the conditions shown in Table 1 below, it can be recognized that there is a handover intention 1 .
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2022091028-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022091028-appb-000001
如此，可以在前述所列的多项状态信息和多项环境信息都表明存在切换意图1的情况下，即，仅在切换意图1非常强烈的情况下，才识别为存在切换意图1。In this way, the handover intention 1 can be identified only when the above-listed items of status information and items of environmental information all indicate that the handover intention 1 exists, that is, only when the handover intention 1 is very strong.
在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1的情况下，则执行S304，以提示用户切换响铃模式。在检测出状态信息和环境信息不满足预设条件1的情况下，则重复执行S301或者S401，以继续监测是否可能存在切换需求。When it is detected that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, S304 is executed to prompt the user to switch the ringing mode. If it is detected that the state information and the environment information do not meet the preset condition 1, S301 or S401 is repeatedly executed to continue monitoring whether there may be a switching requirement.
S304、手机显示切换提示1。其中，该切换提示1用于请求用户确认是否切换为响铃模式。S304. The mobile phone displays a switching prompt 1. Wherein, the switching prompt 1 is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ringing mode.
其中，切换提示1也可以称为第一提示信息。Wherein, the switching prompt 1 may also be referred to as first prompt information.
示例性的，在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1的情况下，手机可显示图5中的(a)示出的锁屏界面501。该锁屏界面501中包括切换提示502，该切换提示502用于提示切换至响铃模式。Exemplarily, when it is detected that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 . The lock screen interface 501 includes a switching prompt 502, and the switching prompt 502 is used to prompt switching to the ringing mode.
其中，切换提示1中包括提示文字、图片或者视频。例如，图5中的(a)所示的切换提示502中包括提示文字“是否调节到响铃模式”。Wherein, the switching prompt 1 includes prompt text, pictures or videos. For example, the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 includes the prompt text "whether to adjust to the ringing mode".
在一些实施例中，切换提示1中还包括控件1，该控件1用于触发手机切换到响铃模式。例如，控件1是图5中的(a)所示的切换提示502中的“确认”按钮503。In some embodiments, the switching prompt 1 further includes a control 1, and the control 1 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the ringing mode. For example, the control 1 is the "OK" button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 .
在另一些实施例中，切换提示1中还包括控件2，该控件2用于触发手机取消提示。例如，控件2是图5中的(a)所示的切换提示502中的“取消”按钮504。In some other embodiments, the switching prompt 1 further includes a control 2, and the control 2 is used to trigger the mobile phone to cancel the prompt. For example, the control 2 is the "Cancel" button 504 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 .
应注意，若通过S401来监测是否可能存在切换声音模式的需求，则在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1的情况下，手机还可以在锁屏界面中显示漏接电话的提示。该漏接电话的提示用于提示用户存在漏接的电话。例如，图5中的(a)所示的锁屏界面501中包括漏接电话的提示505。It should be noted that if S401 is used to monitor whether there may be a need to switch the sound mode, then if the detected state information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone can also display a reminder of missed calls on the lock screen interface. The prompt of the missed call is used to remind the user that there is a missed call. For example, the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 includes a reminder 505 of a missed call.
前文关于切换提示1的显示，是以在锁屏界面中显示为例来说的。应注意，在本申请实施例中，锁屏界面包括手机亮屏后解锁前的界面，此时锁屏界面中通常包括有未解锁的 标识。例如，锁屏界面可以是图5中的(a)示出的锁屏界面501，该锁屏界面501中包括关闭的锁507和文字提示“滑动解锁”508。该关闭的锁507和文字提示“滑动解锁”508可以指示尚未解锁。或者，锁屏界面也可以包括手机亮屏并且人脸解锁后未进入主界面或者应用界面的界面，此时锁屏界面中通常包括有解锁成功的标识。例如，锁屏界面可以是图5中的(b)示出的锁屏界面509，该锁屏界面509中包括解锁成功的标识510。在下文实施例中，主要以锁屏界面是手机亮屏后解锁前的界面来说明。The display of switching prompt 1 in the previous article is based on the display on the lock screen interface as an example. It should be noted that in this embodiment of the present application, the lock screen interface includes the interface before unlocking after the phone is turned on, and the lock screen interface usually includes an unlocked logo at this time. For example, the lock screen interface may be the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) of FIG. The closed lock 507 and the text prompt "slide to unlock" 508 may indicate that it has not been unlocked. Alternatively, the lock screen interface may also include an interface where the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the main interface or the application interface is not entered after face unlocking. At this time, the lock screen interface usually includes an indication of successful unlocking. For example, the lock screen interface may be the lock screen interface 509 shown in (b) of FIG. 5 , and the lock screen interface 509 includes an indication 510 of successful unlocking. In the following embodiments, it is mainly described that the lock screen interface is the interface before unlocking after the screen of the mobile phone is turned on.
并且，为了保证切换提示1可以被用户关注到，若有多条通知消息，则当在锁屏界面中显示切换提示1时，可以将切换提示1显示在前n位。其中，n≥1，n为整数。例如，将切换提示1置顶显示，即n＝1。从而可以提高切换信息的触达率。Moreover, in order to ensure that the switching prompt 1 can be noticed by the user, if there are multiple notification messages, when the switching prompt 1 is displayed on the lock screen interface, the switching prompt 1 can be displayed in the top n positions. Wherein, n≥1, and n is an integer. For example, display switching prompt 1 on top, that is, n=1. Thereby, the reach rate of switching information can be improved.
在锁屏界面中显示的方式主要适用于如下两种情况：情况一，手机检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1时，手机正处于锁屏界面，则可在锁屏界面中显示切换提示1。情况二，手机检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1时，手机处于灭屏状态。在手机亮屏并显示锁屏界面后，则可在锁屏界面中显示切换提示1。示例性的，手机检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1时，手机处于图6所示的灭屏状态下。手机响应于用户对图6中的开机键601的按压操作，可显示图5中的(a)所示的锁屏界面501。如此，手机可以将切换提示1通过锁屏界面及时的展示给用户。但是实际实施时，并不局限于通过锁屏界面来显示切换提示1。The method of displaying on the lock screen is mainly applicable to the following two situations: Situation 1, when the mobile phone detects that the status information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1, and the mobile phone is in the lock screen interface, it can display and switch on the lock screen interface. Tip 1. In the second case, when the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in a screen-off state. After the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the lock screen interface is displayed, switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the lock screen interface. Exemplarily, when the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in the off-screen state shown in FIG. 6 . The mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 501 shown in (a) in FIG. 5 in response to the user pressing the power button 601 in FIG. 6 . In this way, the mobile phone can timely display the switching prompt 1 to the user through the lock screen interface. However, in actual implementation, it is not limited to displaying the switching prompt 1 through the lock screen interface.
在一些实施例中，切换提示1还可以显示在手机的主界面中。情况一，在手机检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1的情况下，若手机当前显示的是主界面，则可在主界面中显示切换提示1。情况二，手机在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1时，手机处于灭屏状态。在手机亮屏并直接显示主界面后，则可在主界面中显示切换提示1。例如，手机在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1时，手机处于图6所示的灭屏状态下。手机响应于用户手指对手机背面的指纹采集区域的按压操作，则可直接显示图7中的(a)示出的主界面701。该主界面701中包括切换提示702。如此，手机可以将切换提示1通过主界面及时的展示给用户。In some embodiments, the switching prompt 1 can also be displayed on the main interface of the mobile phone. Case 1, when the mobile phone detects that the status information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1, if the mobile phone is currently displaying the main interface, a switching prompt 1 can be displayed on the main interface. In the second case, when the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in a screen-off state. After the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the main interface is directly displayed, switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the main interface. For example, when the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in the off-screen state shown in FIG. 6 . The mobile phone may directly display the main interface 701 shown in (a) of FIG. 7 in response to the user's finger pressing operation on the fingerprint collection area on the back of the mobile phone. The main interface 701 includes a switching prompt 702 . In this way, the mobile phone can timely display the switching prompt 1 to the user through the main interface.
在另一些实施例中，切换提示1还可以显示在应用界面中。情况一，在手机检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1的情况下，若手机当前显示的是应用界面，则可在应用界面中显示切换提示1。情况二，手机在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1时，手机处于灭屏状态，并且手机在灭屏前显示的是应用界面。在手机亮屏并直接显示应用界面后，则可在应用界面中显示切换提示1。例如，在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件1时，手机处于图6所示的灭屏状态下，并且，手机在灭屏前显示的是视频应用的应用界面。手机响应于用户手指对手机背面的指纹采集区域的按压操作，则可直接显示图7中的(b)示出的应用界面703。该应用界面703中包括视频应用的内容以及切换提示1704。如此，手机可以将切换提示1通过应用界面及时的展示给用户。In some other embodiments, the switching prompt 1 may also be displayed in the application interface. Case 1, when the mobile phone detects that the status information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1, if the mobile phone is currently displaying an application interface, a switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the application interface. Case 2: When the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in a screen-off state, and the mobile phone displays an application interface before the screen is off. After the screen of the mobile phone is turned on and the application interface is directly displayed, a switching prompt 1 may be displayed on the application interface. For example, when it is detected that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 1, the mobile phone is in the off-screen state shown in FIG. 6 , and the mobile phone displays the application interface of the video application before the screen is off. The mobile phone can directly display the application interface 703 shown in (b) of FIG. 7 in response to the user's finger pressing operation on the fingerprint collection area on the back of the mobile phone. The application interface 703 includes content of the video application and a switching prompt 1704 . In this way, the mobile phone can timely display the switching prompt 1 to the user through the application interface.
并且，与在锁屏界面中显示切换提示1不同的是：在主界面或应用界面中显示切换提示1时，为了避免影响用户使用手机，通常不会长时间显示切换提示1。这种情况下，用户可能错过切换提示1。尤其是在情况一中，手机当前显示的是主界面或者应用界面，但是用户可能并未使用手机，如将手机放置在桌上。Moreover, the difference from displaying the switching prompt 1 on the lock screen interface is that when the switching prompt 1 is displayed on the main interface or the application interface, in order to avoid affecting the user's use of the mobile phone, the switching prompt 1 is usually not displayed for a long time. In this case, the user may miss switching prompt 1. Especially in case one, the mobile phone currently displays the main interface or the application interface, but the user may not be using the mobile phone, such as placing the mobile phone on a table.
基于此，在一些实施例中，手机在主界面或者应用界面中显示切换提示1之前，手机 可以检测用户是否正在使用手机。进一步的，为了保证用户双眼可以关注到切换提示1，手机可以通过注视感知技术检测用户的眼睛是否正在注视手机屏幕。若用户的眼睛正在注视手机屏幕，则表明正在使用手机。相应的，若检测到用户正在使用手机，手机则在主界面或者应用界面中显示切换提示1。如此，可以保证让用户查看到切换提示1。Based on this, in some embodiments, before the mobile phone displays the switching prompt 1 on the main interface or the application interface, the mobile phone can detect whether the user is using the mobile phone. Furthermore, in order to ensure that the user's eyes can pay attention to the switching prompt 1, the mobile phone can detect whether the user's eyes are looking at the mobile phone screen through gaze sensing technology. If the user's eyes are looking at the screen of the mobile phone, it means that the mobile phone is being used. Correspondingly, if it is detected that the user is using the mobile phone, the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 1 on the main interface or the application interface. In this way, it can be ensured that the user can view the switching prompt 1 .
在下文实施例中，将主要以在锁屏界面中显示切换提示1为例来说明本申请方案。In the following embodiments, the solution of the present application will be described mainly by taking the display of switching prompt 1 on the lock screen interface as an example.
S305、手机响应于用户对该切换提示1的操作1，将声音模式切换为响铃模式。S305. The mobile phone switches the sound mode to the ringing mode in response to the user's operation 1 on the switching prompt 1.
其中，操作1也可以称为第一操作。Wherein, operation 1 may also be referred to as a first operation.
在S305之前，手机可接收用户对该切换提示1的操作1。其中，操作1可以是用户对切换提示的点击操作或者长按操作。或者，该操作1也可以是预设手势1(如“√”手势)。下文实施例中，将主要以操作1是用户对切换提示1中控件1的点击操作为例来说明。Before S305, the mobile phone may receive the user's operation 1 on the switching prompt 1. Wherein, operation 1 may be a click operation or a long press operation of the user on the switching prompt. Alternatively, the operation 1 may also be a preset gesture 1 (such as a "√" gesture). In the following embodiments, it will be mainly described by taking that operation 1 is the user's click operation on the control 1 in the switching prompt 1 as an example.
示例性的，以控件1是图5中的(a)所示的切换提示502中的“确认”按钮503为例。手机可接收用户对图5中的(a)所示的切换提示502中的“确认”按钮503的点击操作。手机响应于该点击操作，可显示图8中的(a)示出的解锁界面801。而后，用户通过输入密码、指纹或者扫描人脸解锁成功后，手机可显示图8中的(b)示出的主界面802，该主界面802中的状态栏中显示的是响铃模式的图标803。也就是说，手机响应于用户对控件1的点击操作以及解锁操作，则可将声音模式从静音模式切换为响铃模式。Exemplarily, it is assumed that the control 1 is the "confirm" button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 as an example. The mobile phone may receive the user's click operation on the "Confirm" button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 . In response to the click operation, the mobile phone may display the unlocking interface 801 shown in (a) of FIG. 8 . Then, after the user successfully unlocks by entering the password, fingerprint or scanning the face, the mobile phone can display the main interface 802 shown in (b) in Figure 8, and what is displayed in the status bar of the main interface 802 is the icon of the ringing mode 803. That is to say, the mobile phone can switch the sound mode from the silent mode to the ringing mode in response to the user's click operation and unlock operation on the control 1 .
应注意，在锁屏界面是手机亮屏后解锁前的界面的情况下，需要用户在执行操作1后，进一步解锁才能触发手机切换声音模式。通过这种方式，需要身份识别后才能切换，可以避免非机主对手机操作，而触发声音模式的切换。It should be noted that when the lock screen interface is the interface before unlocking after the phone is turned on, the user needs to perform operation 1 to further unlock the phone to trigger the phone to switch the sound mode. In this way, the switch can only be performed after identity recognition, which can prevent the non-owner from operating the mobile phone and triggering the switch of the sound mode.
除此之外，若切换提示1显示在人脸解锁后未进入主界面或者应用界面的界面(如图5中的(b)示出的锁屏界面509)，主界面(如图7中的(a)示出的主界面701)，应用界面(如图7中的(b)示出的应用界面703)，则手机响应于用户对该切换提示1的操作1，可直接将声音模式切换为响铃模式，并且可将切换提示1关闭。In addition, if the switching prompt 1 shows an interface that does not enter the main interface or application interface after face unlocking (such as the lock screen interface 509 shown in (b) in Figure 5), the main interface (such as the one in Figure 7 The main interface 701 shown in (a)), the application interface (such as the application interface 703 shown in (b) in Figure 7), then the mobile phone can directly switch the sound mode in response to the user's operation 1 of the switching prompt 1 It is the ring mode, and the switching prompt 1 can be turned off.
在本申请实施例中，手机响应于操作1，才切换发到响铃模式。如此，手机可以基于用户的意愿而切换声音模式，可以弥补识别结果不准确的缺陷。In the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone switches to the ringing mode only in response to operation 1. In this way, the mobile phone can switch the sound mode based on the user's will, which can make up for the defect of inaccurate recognition results.
S306、手机响应于预设事件1，关闭切换提示1。其中，手机的声音模式不变。S306. The mobile phone closes the switching prompt 1 in response to the preset event 1. Among them, the sound mode of the mobile phone remains unchanged.
其中，预设事件1可以是用户对切换提示1的操作2。该操作2可以是点击操作或者长按操作等。或者，该操作2也可以是预设手势2(如左滑手势、上滑手势等)。下文实施例中，将主要以操作2是对切换提示1中控件2的点击操作为例来说明。Wherein, the preset event 1 may be the user's operation 2 on the switching prompt 1 . The operation 2 may be a click operation or a long press operation or the like. Alternatively, the operation 2 may also be a preset gesture 2 (such as a left swipe gesture, an up swipe gesture, etc.). In the following embodiments, it will be mainly described by taking operation 2 as an example of clicking the control 2 in the switching prompt 1.
示例性的，以控件1是图5中的(a)所示的切换提示502中的“确认”按钮503为例。手机可接收用户对图5中的(a)所示的切换提示502中的“确认”按钮503的点击操作。手机响应于该点击操作，可显示图9示出的锁屏界面901。一方面，锁屏界面901的状态栏中显示的是静音模式的图标902，锁屏界面501的状态栏中显示的也是静音模式的图标506。也就是说，声音模式保持不变。另一方面，与锁屏界面501不同的是：锁屏界面901中不包括切换提示1。也就是说，手机已关闭切换提示1的显示。Exemplarily, it is assumed that the control 1 is the "confirm" button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 as an example. The mobile phone may receive the user's click operation on the "Confirm" button 503 in the switching prompt 502 shown in (a) of FIG. 5 . In response to the click operation, the mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 901 shown in FIG. 9 . On the one hand, the status bar of the lock screen interface 901 displays the mute mode icon 902 , and the status bar of the lock screen interface 501 also displays the mute mode icon 506 . That said, the sound mode remains the same. On the other hand, what is different from the lock screen interface 501 is that the lock screen interface 901 does not include the switching prompt 1 . That is to say, the mobile phone has turned off the display of switching prompt 1.
或者，预设事件1可以是切换提示1的显示时长达到预设时长1的事件。具体地，针对在主界面或者应用界面中显示切换提示1的情况，为了避免影响用户使用手机，在无用户操作的情况下，通常仅显示预设时长1。例如，预设时长可以是3秒、5秒或者10秒等。因此，针对这种情况，当切换提示1的显示时长达到预设时长1，手机则关闭切换提示1 的显示，并且保持当前的声音模式不变。Alternatively, the preset event 1 may be an event that the display duration of the switching prompt 1 reaches the preset duration 1 . Specifically, in the case of displaying the switching prompt 1 on the main interface or the application interface, in order to avoid affecting the user's use of the mobile phone, usually only the preset duration 1 is displayed in the case of no user operation. For example, the preset duration may be 3 seconds, 5 seconds or 10 seconds. Therefore, for this situation, when the display duration of the switching prompt 1 reaches the preset duration 1, the mobile phone closes the display of the switching prompt 1 and keeps the current sound mode unchanged.
S307、在将声音模式切换为响铃模式的情况下，手机接收到来电或者通知消息后，响铃提示用户。S307. When the sound mode is switched to the ring mode, the mobile phone rings to remind the user after receiving an incoming call or a notification message.
在切换为响铃模式后，即手机当前采用的声音模式调整为响铃模式，手机则以响铃模式来完成来电提示或者通知消息提示，以便用户及时接听到来电或者接收到通知消息。After switching to the ring mode, that is, the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone is adjusted to the ring mode, and the mobile phone uses the ring mode to complete the incoming call prompt or notification message prompt, so that the user can answer the incoming call or receive the notification message in time.
综上所述，采用本申请实施例的方法，手机可以在监测到可能存在切换声音模式的需求的情况下，识别用户是否存在切换意图1。从而可以有针对性的识别，有利于降低手机功耗。进一步的，手机根据状态信息和环境来识别是否存在切换意图1，可以提高识别结果的准确性。在识别出存在切换意图1的情况下，手机在锁屏界面或者主界面等位置处显示切换提示1，以提示用户切换到响铃模式；并且，用户操作该切换提示1可触发手机切换到响铃模式。如此，手机可以为有切换意图1的用户提供便捷的切换入口。从而可以快切换至响铃模式。在切换为响铃模式后，手机则可通过响铃提示来电或者通知消息等信息，避免用户错过各种信息。To sum up, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone can identify whether the user has switching intention 1 when detecting that there may be a need to switch the voice mode. Therefore, targeted identification can be performed, which is beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the mobile phone. Furthermore, the mobile phone identifies whether there is a switching intention 1 according to the state information and the environment, which can improve the accuracy of the identification result. When it is recognized that there is a switching intention 1, the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 1 on the lock screen interface or the main interface to prompt the user to switch to the ringing mode; and the user operates the switching prompting 1 to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the ringing mode. bell pattern. In this way, the mobile phone can provide a convenient switching entry for users with switching intention 1. This enables a quick switch to ring mode. After switching to the ring mode, the mobile phone can ring to prompt information such as incoming calls or notification messages, so as to prevent users from missing various information.
进一步的，前文场景1的实施例中，在检测到手机的状态(如状态信息)和手机所处的环境(如环境信息)满足预设条件1的情况下，则向用户推送切换提示1。而实际中，不同用户对切换提示的需求不同，例如，对于日常不会切换声音模式的用户而言，其对切换提示没有需求。Further, in the embodiment of Scenario 1 above, when it is detected that the state of the mobile phone (such as state information) and the environment of the mobile phone (such as environmental information) meet the preset condition 1, a switching prompt 1 is pushed to the user. In practice, different users have different needs for switching prompts. For example, for users who do not switch sound modes on a daily basis, they have no need for switching prompts.
基于此，在另一些实施例中，为了实现有针对性的推送。具体的，如图10所示，在S303之前，还包括S1001。Based on this, in other embodiments, in order to achieve targeted push. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10 , before S303 , S1001 is also included.
S1001、手机检测用户画像是否满足预设条件2。若是，则执行S303；若否，则执行S301或者S401。S1001. The mobile phone detects whether the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2. If yes, execute S303; if not, execute S301 or S401.
其中，预设条件2也可以称为第二预设条件。Wherein, the preset condition 2 may also be referred to as a second preset condition.
其中，用户画像可指示用户对声音模式的切换习惯。并且，用户画像满足预设条件2，则表明用户对手机推送切换提示1以快捷切换至响铃模式的需求度较高，该用户是推送切换提示1的目标用户。Among them, the user portrait may indicate the user's habit of switching voice modes. In addition, if the user portrait meets the preset condition 2, it indicates that the user has a high demand for the mobile phone to quickly switch to the ring mode by pushing the switching prompt 1, and this user is the target user of the push switching prompt 1.
下面将列举可以指示用户对声音模式的切换习惯的几种典型用户画像，并说明检测用户画像是否满足预设条件2的具体实现。The following will list several typical user portraits that can indicate the user's habit of switching voice modes, and describe the specific implementation of detecting whether the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2.
在一些实施例中，用户画像包括手机在第二预设时间段内响应于用户的操作切换声音模式的次数1(也可以称为第一次数)，其中，第二预设时间段是指当前时间之前的一段预设时间。例如，第二预设时间是最近1个月，半年等。如此，以保证次数1的时效性。若次数1超过预设次数1(也可以称为第一预设次数)，则用户画像满足预设条件2。其中，次数1超过预设次数1，表明用户会较频繁的切换声音模式，该用户是目标用户。若用户切换声音模式的次数1未超过预设次数1，则用户画像不满足预设条件2，该用户不是目标用户。如此，手机可以将经常切换声音模式的用户确定为推送切换提示的目标用户。In some embodiments, the user portrait includes the number of times 1 (also referred to as the first number) that the mobile phone switches the sound mode in response to the user's operation within the second preset time period, wherein the second preset time period refers to A preset time before the current time. For example, the second preset time is the last month, half a year and so on. In this way, the timeliness of the number 1 is guaranteed. If the number of times 1 exceeds the preset number of times 1 (also referred to as the first preset number of times), the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2 . Wherein, the number of times 1 exceeds the preset number of times 1, indicating that the user will switch the sound mode more frequently, and the user is the target user. If the number of times 1 of switching voice modes by the user does not exceed the preset number of times 1, the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 2, and the user is not a target user. In this way, the mobile phone can determine the user who frequently switches the sound mode as the target user to push the switching prompt.
在一些实施例中，用户画像包括用户在不同的环境信息(如环境场所、环境音)下采用的声音模式的情况。例如，用户在嘈杂的环境下采用响铃模式，用户在室内采用静音模式。In some embodiments, the user portrait includes the voice mode adopted by the user under different environmental information (eg, environmental location, environmental sound). For example, the user adopts the ring mode in a noisy environment, and the user adopts the silent mode indoors.
在本实施例中，用户画像包括手机在第四预设时间段内，在环境音大于预设分贝值1的情况下，响应于用户的操作切换到响铃模式的次数2(也可以称为第三次数)。同样的， 第四预设时间段是指当前时间之前的一段预设时间。例如，第四预设时间是最近1个月，半年等。如此，以保证次数2的时效性。若次数2超过预设次数2(也可以称为第三预设次数)，则表明用户倾向在嘈杂的环境下采用响铃模式，则用户画像满足预设条件2。该情况下，该用户是目标用户。反之，若次数2未超过预设次数2，则用户画像不满足预设条件2。该情况下，该用户不是目标用户。其中，关于预设分贝值1，可参见前文S303中的说明，此处不再赘述。如此，手机可以将在嘈杂的环境下倾向切换至响铃模式的用户确定为推送切换提示1的目标用户。In this embodiment, the user portrait includes the number of times the mobile phone switches to the ring mode in response to the user's operation 2 (also referred to as third times). Likewise, the fourth preset time period refers to a preset time before the current time. For example, the fourth preset time is the last month, half a year and so on. In this way, the timeliness of times 2 is guaranteed. If the number of times 2 exceeds the preset number of times 2 (also referred to as the third preset number of times), it indicates that the user tends to use the ringing mode in a noisy environment, and the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2. In this case, the user is the target user. On the contrary, if the number of times 2 does not exceed the preset number of times 2, the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 2. In this case, the user is not the target user. Wherein, for the preset decibel value 1, refer to the description in S303 above, which will not be repeated here. In this way, the mobile phone can determine the user who tends to switch to the ring mode in a noisy environment as the target user to push the switching prompt 1 .
其中，手机可在检测到声音模式变化后触发手机采集所处环境的环境音。而后结合当前时刻手机的声音模式，则可确定切换声音模式时的环境音。并且，在检测到声音模式发生切换后触发采集，可以实现低功耗声音采集，降低手机功耗。Among them, the mobile phone can trigger the mobile phone to collect the ambient sound of the environment after detecting the change of the sound mode. Then combined with the sound mode of the mobile phone at the current moment, the ambient sound when switching the sound mode can be determined. Moreover, the acquisition is triggered after the switching of the sound mode is detected, which can realize sound acquisition with low power consumption and reduce the power consumption of the mobile phone.
或者，用户在预设环境场所下采用响铃模式的次数3大于预设次数3，则表明用户倾向在路边、车厢等预设场所中使用响铃模式，用户画像满足预设条件2。该情况下，该用户是目标用户。反之，用户在预设环境场所下采用响铃模式的次数3小于或等于预设次数3，则用户画像不满足预设条件2。该情况下，该用户不是目标用户。其中，关于预设场所可参见前文S303中的说明，此处不再赘述。如此，手机可以将在预设场所中使用响铃模式的用户确定为推送切换提示的目标用户。Alternatively, if the number of times 3 that the user uses the ringing pattern in the preset environment is greater than the preset number 3, it indicates that the user tends to use the ringing pattern in preset places such as roadsides and carriages, and the user portrait meets the preset condition 2. In this case, the user is the target user. Conversely, if the number 3 of ringing patterns used by the user in the preset environment is less than or equal to the preset number 3, the user profile does not meet the preset condition 2. In this case, the user is not the target user. Wherein, for the preset location, reference may be made to the description in S303 above, which will not be repeated here. In this way, the mobile phone can determine the user who uses the ring pattern in the preset location as the target user to push the switching prompt.
在另一些实施例中，用户画像包括手机在第三预设时间段内响应于操作1切换声音模式的次数4(也可以称为第二次数)。同样的，第三预设时间段是指当前时间之前的一段预设时间。例如，第四预设时间是最近1个月，半年等。如此，以保证次数4的时效性。其中，预设次数4与切换提示1的显示次数相关。例如，预设次数4与显示次数的比值大于50％。若次数4超过预设次数4(也可以称为第二预设次数)，则该用户对通过切换提示1切换声音模式的接受度较高，此时用户画像满足预设条件2。该情况下，该用户是目标用户。反之，若次数4未超过预设次数4，则用户画像不满足预设条件2，该用户不是目标用户。如此，手机可以将对通过切换提示1切换声音模式的接受度较高的用户进一步确定为后续推送切换提示1的目标用户。In some other embodiments, the user profile includes the number 4 (also referred to as the second number) of switching the sound mode of the mobile phone in response to the operation 1 within the third preset time period. Similarly, the third preset time period refers to a preset time before the current time. For example, the fourth preset time is the last month, half a year and so on. In this way, the timeliness of the number 4 is guaranteed. Wherein, the preset number of times 4 is related to the display times of the switching prompt 1. For example, the ratio of the preset number 4 to the displayed number is greater than 50%. If the number of times 4 exceeds the preset number of times 4 (also referred to as the second preset number of times), the user has a higher acceptance of switching the sound mode through the switching prompt 1, and the user portrait meets the preset condition 2 at this time. In this case, the user is the target user. On the contrary, if the number of times 4 does not exceed the preset number of times 4, the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 2, and the user is not a target user. In this way, the mobile phone can further determine users who are more receptive to switching the sound mode by switching the prompt 1 as target users for subsequent pushing of the switching prompt 1 .
应注意，前文仅以几种典型的用户画像说明了检测用户画像是否预设条件2的具体实现。但是实际实施时，并不以此为限。示例性的，用户画像还可以包括用户在不同时间段采用的声音模式的情况。例如，用户在工作时间采用响铃模式，在休息时间采用静音模式或者震动模式。又示例性的，用户画像还可以用户在不同位置采用的声音模式的情况。例如，用户在家里和办公室里采用响铃模式，在除该两地之外的位置采用静音模式或者震动模式。It should be noted that the foregoing only uses several typical user portraits to illustrate the specific implementation of detecting whether the user portrait is the preset condition 2. However, in actual implementation, it is not limited to this. Exemplarily, the user portrait may also include the voice mode adopted by the user in different time periods. For example, the user adopts a ring mode during working hours, and adopts a silent mode or a vibration mode during rest time. As another example, the user portrait may also be the voice mode adopted by the user at different locations. For example, the user adopts ring mode at home and office, and adopts silent mode or vibrate mode in other places.
应理解，因采用的用户画像不同，相应的，在识别切换意图时检测的维度也可能不同。例如，采用的用户画像包括用户在不同时间段采用的声音模式的情况，则在识别切换意图时，还需检测当前时间是否在采用相应的声音模式的时间段内。It should be understood that due to the different user portraits used, correspondingly, the dimensions detected when identifying the switching intention may also be different. For example, if the user portrait used includes the voice mode adopted by the user in different time periods, then when the switch intention is recognized, it is also necessary to detect whether the current time is within the time period of adopting the corresponding voice mode.
在手机检测出用户画像满足预设条件2的情况下，则执行S303，以进一步识别用户的切换意图。反之，在手机检测出用户画像不满足预设条件2的情况下，则此次不显示切换提示1，并继续S301或者S401及其后续步骤。应注意，用户画像是会不断更新的，当前不满足预设条件2，以后可能会满足预设条件2。因此，在检测出用户画像不满足预设条件2的情况下，则重复执行S301或者S401。When the mobile phone detects that the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 2, S303 is executed to further identify the user's switching intention. On the contrary, when the mobile phone detects that the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 2, the switching prompt 1 is not displayed this time, and S301 or S401 and subsequent steps are continued. It should be noted that the user portrait will be updated continuously, and the preset condition 2 is not satisfied at present, and the preset condition 2 may be satisfied in the future. Therefore, when it is detected that the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 2, S301 or S401 is repeatedly executed.
需要说明的是，虽然在图10所示的实施例中，以S1001位于S302和S303之间来说明。在S302之前执行S1001，则可以在用户为目标用户的情况下，才进一步识别用户的切换意图。如此，可以避免手机进行无效的运算。但是，在实际实施时，只要S1001识别目标用户的步骤位于S304之前即可，而并不以图10所示的时序为限。并且，若识别出为目标用户，则执行下一个步骤，若识别出不是目标用户，则进入下一轮监测。It should be noted that although in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 , S1001 is located between S302 and S303 for illustration. If S1001 is executed before S302, the switching intention of the user can be further identified only when the user is the target user. In this way, the mobile phone can be prevented from performing invalid calculations. However, in actual implementation, as long as the step of identifying the target user in S1001 is before S304, it is not limited to the time sequence shown in FIG. 10 . And, if it is identified as the target user, then execute the next step, if it is identified as not the target user, then enter the next round of monitoring.
另外，构建用户画像需要一定的时间。在一种具体的实现方式中，在实施本申请方案的前期，可以采用图3所示的实施例来实现。并在该过程中，构建用户画像。例如，根据用户对切换提示的操作统计次数4。在形成较完善的用户画像后，则采用图10所示的实施例来实现本申请方案，同时不断更新用户画像以供后续使用。在另一种具体的实现方式中，可以在实施本申请方案之前，设置初始的用户画像，并采用图10所示的实施例来实现本申请方案，同时不断更新用户画像以供后续使用。In addition, it takes a certain amount of time to build user portraits. In a specific implementation manner, in the early stage of implementing the solution of the present application, the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 may be used for implementation. And in the process, build user portraits. For example, count the number of times 4 according to the user's operation on the switching prompt. After a relatively complete user portrait is formed, the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 is used to implement the solution of this application, and the user portrait is continuously updated for subsequent use. In another specific implementation manner, before implementing the solution of this application, an initial user portrait can be set, and the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 is used to realize the solution of this application, and the user portrait is continuously updated for subsequent use.
综上所述，采用本申请实施例的方法，手机可以根据用户画像检测用户对推送切换提示以切换声音模式的需求对，从而识别出该用户是否为推送切换提示的目标用户。而后，针对目标用户推送切换提示。如此，可以实现有针对性的推送，避免不必要的推送及其后续处理，减少手机运算。同时，还可以减少对非目标用户的干扰。To sum up, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone can detect the user's demand for switching the voice mode by pushing the switching prompt according to the user portrait, so as to identify whether the user is the target user of the pushing switching prompt. Then, a switching prompt is pushed to the target user. In this way, targeted push can be realized, unnecessary push and subsequent processing can be avoided, and mobile phone calculations can be reduced. At the same time, interference to non-target users can also be reduced.
场景2，本申请实施例提供一种声音模式的切换方法，在本实施例中，声音模式的切换是指从响铃模式切换为振动模式或者静音模式，即模式1是振动模式或者静音模式。具体的，如图11所示，该方法包括S1101-S1107。 Scenario 2. The embodiment of the present application provides a method for switching sound modes. In this embodiment, switching sound modes refers to switching from ring mode to vibration mode or silent mode, that is, mode 1 is vibration mode or silent mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11 , the method includes S1101-S1107.
S1101、***测其所在环境的预设环境参数是否发生预设变化。若是，则执行S1102；若否，则继续执行S1101。S1101. The mobile phone monitors whether a preset environmental parameter of the environment where the mobile phone is located undergoes a preset change. If yes, execute S1102; if not, continue to execute S1101.
在场景2中，预设环境参数同样可以称为第一环境参数。In Scenario 2, the preset environment parameter may also be referred to as a first environment parameter.
关于该S1101的具体实施，可参见场景1中S301的说明，此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation of S1101, refer to the description of S301 in Scenario 1, which will not be repeated here.
与场景1中类似的，手机也可以周期性的或者定时的执行下述S1102，而无需通过S1101来触发。Similar to Scenario 1, the mobile phone may also periodically or periodically execute the following S1102 without triggering S1101.
S1102、手机获取状态信息和环境信息。其中，状态信息包括手机当前采用的声音模式，环境信息包括环境音。S1102. The mobile phone acquires status information and environment information. Wherein, the state information includes the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone, and the environment information includes the environment sound.
关于该S1102的具体实施，可参见场景1中S302的说明，此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation of S1102, refer to the description of S302 in Scenario 1, which will not be repeated here.
S1103、手机检测该状态信息和环境信息是否满足预设条件3。若是，则执行S1104；若否，则重复执行S1101。S1103. The mobile phone detects whether the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 3. If yes, execute S1104; if not, execute S1101 repeatedly.
在场景2中，预设条件3也可以称为第一预设条件。In scenario 2, preset condition 3 may also be called a first preset condition.
其中，若手机检测到该状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件3，则表明满足从响铃模式切换至静音模式或者震动模式的条件。该情况下则存在从响铃模式切换至静音模式或者震动模式的切换意图(即切换意图2)。反之，若手机检测到该状态信息和环境信息不满足预设条件3，则表明不满足从响铃模式切换至静音模式或者震动模式的条件。该情况下不存在切换意图2。Wherein, if the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 3, it indicates that the condition for switching from ring mode to silent mode or vibration mode is met. In this case, there is a switching intention (that is, switching intention 2) from the ringing mode to the silent mode or the vibrating mode. On the contrary, if the mobile phone detects that the state information and the environment information do not meet the preset condition 3, it indicates that the condition for switching from the ring mode to the silent mode or the vibration mode is not met. In this case there is no handover intent 2.
下文中，将针对S302中列举的状态信息和环境信息，来说明检测该状态信息和环境信息是否满足预设条件3的具体实现。Hereinafter, with regard to the state information and environment information listed in S302, the specific implementation of detecting whether the state information and environment information satisfy the preset condition 3 will be described.
第一方面，针对状态信息的检测。The first aspect is for the detection of state information.
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括手机当前采用的声音模式1。相应的，手机可检测该 声音模式1是否为响铃模式。若该声音模式1是响铃模式，该状态信息满足预设条件3，此时存在切换意图2。反之，若该声音模式1是静音模式或者震动模式，该状态信息不满足预设条件3，此时则不存在切换意图2。如此，手机可以将未及时切换到静音模式或者震动模式的情况识别为存在切换意图2的情况。也就是说，场景2的前提应该是手机当前采用的声音模式为响铃模式。在声音模式为响铃模式的情况下，才需要进一步去检测其它状态信息和环境信息。In some embodiments, the status information includes the sound mode 1 currently used by the mobile phone. Correspondingly, the mobile phone can detect whether the sound pattern 1 is a ringing pattern. If the sound mode 1 is a ringing mode, the state information satisfies the preset condition 3, and there is a switch intention 2 at this time. On the contrary, if the sound mode 1 is a silent mode or a vibration mode, and the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 3, then there is no switching intention 2 at this time. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that the situation of not switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode in time is the situation of switching intention 2 . That is to say, the premise of scenario 2 should be that the sound mode currently adopted by the mobile phone is the ringing mode. When the sound mode is the ring mode, it is necessary to further detect other state information and environment information.
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括手机是否连接可穿戴设备的指示信息。相应的，若手机是否连接可穿戴设备的指示信息为指示信息1，则状态信息满足预设条件3。其中，指示信息1用于指示手机连接了可穿戴设备。若手机连接了可穿戴设备，手机可利用可穿戴设备来提示来电或者通知消息等。从而无需通过响铃来提示，此时需要切换到静音模式或震动模式，从而存在切换意图2。反之，若手机是否连接可穿戴设备的指示信息为指示信息2，则状态信息不满足预设条件3。其中，指示信息2用于指示手机未连接可穿戴设备。若手机未连接可穿戴设备，则通常需要通过手机响铃来提示来电或者通知消息等，此时不能切到静音模式或者震动模式，从而不存在切换意图2。如此，手机可将来电或者通知消息等可以及时通过可穿戴设备来提示的情况识别为存在切换意图2的情况。In some embodiments, the state information includes indication information whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device. Correspondingly, if the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 1, the state information satisfies the preset condition 3. Wherein, the indication information 1 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is connected with a wearable device, the mobile phone can use the wearable device to prompt incoming calls or notification messages. Therefore, there is no need to remind by ringing the bell. At this time, it is necessary to switch to silent mode or vibration mode, so there is switching intention 2. Conversely, if the indication information indicating whether the mobile phone is connected to the wearable device is indication information 2, the status information does not satisfy the preset condition 3. Wherein, the indication information 2 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device. If the mobile phone is not connected to the wearable device, the mobile phone usually needs to ring to prompt incoming calls or notification messages, etc. At this time, it cannot switch to silent mode or vibration mode, so there is no switching intention 2. In this way, the mobile phone can identify situations that can be promptly prompted by the wearable device, such as an incoming call or a notification message, as a situation where there is a handover intention 2 .
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息。相应的，若可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息为指示信息3，则状态信息满足预设条件3。其中，指示信息3用于指示可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上。若可穿戴设备佩戴在用户身上，则用户可以很容易从上述可穿戴设备中查看到来电或者通知消息的提示。从而无需通过手机响铃来提示，此时可以切换到静音模式或者震动模式，从而存在切换意图2。反之，若可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上的指示信息为指示信息4，则状态信息不满足预设条件3。其中，指示信息4用于指示可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上。若可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上，则即使通过上述可穿戴设备提示了来电或者通知消息等，用户也可能无法查看到，从而也需要通过响铃来提示，此时不能切换到静音模式或者震动模式，从而不存在切换意图2。如此，手机可以将用户可以通过其它途径获取来电或者通知消息等提示的情况识别为存在切换意图2的情况。In some embodiments, the status information includes information indicating whether the wearable device is worn by the user. Correspondingly, if the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 3, the state information satisfies the preset condition 3. Wherein, the indication information 3 is used to indicate that the wearable device is worn on the user. If the wearable device is worn on the user, the user can easily view the prompt of the incoming call or notification message from the wearable device. Therefore, there is no need to prompt by ringing the mobile phone. At this time, the user can switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode, so that there is switching intention 2. On the contrary, if the indication information indicating whether the wearable device is worn on the user is indication information 4, the state information does not satisfy the preset condition 3. Wherein, the indication information 4 is used to indicate that the wearable device is not worn on the user. If the wearable device is not worn on the user's body, the user may not be able to view it even if the wearable device prompts an incoming call or notification message, etc., and thus needs to be prompted by ringing, and cannot switch to silent mode or vibrate at this time mode, so that there is no switch intent 2. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the situation that the user can obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages through other channels as the situation of switching intention 2 .
在一些实施例中，状态信息包括用户是否正在使用手机的指示信息。相应的，若用户是否正在使用手机的指示信息为指示信息5，则状态信息满足预设条件3。其中，指示信息5用于指示用户正在使用手机。用户正在使用手机，则可以及时获取到来电或者通知消息等提示，此时可以切换到静音模式或者震动模式，从而存在切换意图2。反之，若用户是否正在使用手机的指示信息为指示信息6，则状态信息满足预设条件3。其中，指示信息6用于指示用户未在使用手机。若用户未在使用手机，则可能无法及时获取到来电或者通知消息等提示，此时不能切换到静音模式或者震动模式，从而不存在切换意图2。如此，手机可以将用户可以方便的获取到来电或者通知消息等提示的情况识别为存在切换意图2的情况。In some embodiments, the status information includes an indication of whether the user is using the cell phone. Correspondingly, if the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is indication information 5, the state information satisfies the preset condition 3. Wherein, the indication information 5 is used to indicate that the user is using the mobile phone. If the user is using the mobile phone, he can obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages in time, and can switch to silent mode or vibration mode at this time, so there is switching intention 2. On the contrary, if the indication information indicating whether the user is using the mobile phone is the indication information 6, then the state information satisfies the preset condition 3. Wherein, the indication information 6 is used to indicate that the user is not using the mobile phone. If the user is not using the mobile phone, he may not be able to obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages in time, and cannot switch to silent mode or vibration mode at this time, so there is no switching intention 2. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize the fact that the user can conveniently obtain prompts such as incoming calls or notification messages as the fact that there is a handover intention 2 .
第二方面，针对环境信息的检测。The second aspect is for the detection of environmental information.
在一些实施例中，环境信息包括手机所处环境的环境音。具体的，该环境音是最近一次采集的环境音，即当前环境的环境音(记为环境音1)。相应的，手机可获取该环境音1(如从TEE中获取)，检测该环境音1是否超过预设分贝值2(在场景2中，该预设分贝 值2也可以称为第一分贝)。若检测到环境音1未超过预设分贝值2，则环境信息满足预设条件3。一般而言，环境音在60分贝以下，则环境比较安静，预设分贝值2可以是小于或等于60分贝的值。例如，预设分贝值2是60分贝，40分贝等。若环境音1未超过预设分贝值2，则所处环境相对安静，手机响铃可能会影响周围的人。该情况下，可能存在切换意图2。反之，若检测到环境音1超过预设分贝值2，则环境信息不满足预设条件3。环境音1超过预设分贝值2，则用户可能无法感受到手机震动，也有可能因环境嘈杂而未关注到来电提示(如亮屏提示)。该情况下，通常不存在切换意图2。如此，手机可以将环境安静的情况识别为存在切换意图2的情况。In some embodiments, the environmental information includes environmental sounds of the environment where the mobile phone is located. Specifically, the environmental sound is the latest collected environmental sound, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (denoted as environmental sound 1). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can obtain the ambient sound 1 (such as obtained from TEE), and detect whether the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2 (in scene 2, the preset decibel value 2 can also be called the first decibel) . If the detected environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . Generally speaking, if the ambient sound is below 60 decibels, the environment is relatively quiet, and the preset decibel value 2 may be a value less than or equal to 60 decibels. For example, the preset decibel value 2 is 60dB, 40dB, etc. If the ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, the environment is relatively quiet, and the ringing of the mobile phone may affect the surrounding people. In this case, Handover Intent 2 may exist. On the contrary, if the detected environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 3 . If the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, the user may not be able to feel the vibration of the mobile phone, or may not pay attention to the incoming call reminder (such as a bright screen reminder) due to the noisy environment. In this case, handover intent 2 usually does not exist. In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that the environment is quiet as the handover intention 2 exists.
或者，该环境音可以是最近至少两次采集的环境音，即当前环境的环境音(环境音1)和历史环境的至少一个环境音(记为环境音2)。相应的，手机可获取环境音1和环境音2(如从TEE中获取)，并检测该环境音1是否超过预设分贝值2，以及检测该环境音2是否超过预设分贝值1。其中，预设分贝值2小于或等于预设分贝值1。Alternatively, the environmental sound may be at least two recently collected environmental sounds, that is, the environmental sound of the current environment (environmental sound 1) and at least one environmental sound of the historical environment (marked as environmental sound 2). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can obtain the environmental sound 1 and the environmental sound 2 (for example, from TEE), and detect whether the environmental sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, and detect whether the environmental sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 1. Wherein, the preset decibel value 2 is less than or equal to the preset decibel value 1 .
若检测到该环境音1未超过预设分贝值2，以及检测到该环境音2超过预设分贝值1，则环境信息满足预设条件3。环境音2超过预设分贝值1，表明历史环境为相对嘈杂的环境；环境音1未超过预设分贝值2，表明当前环境为相对安静的环境。也就是说，手机从嘈杂的环境移动到安静的环境。该情况下，用户极有可能因未及时切换到静音模式或者震动模式而影响周围的人，此时存在切换意图2。同样的，预设分贝值2小于预设分贝值1，可以避免因环境音的采集误差而导致对切换意图的识别误差。If the detected environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2 and the detected environmental sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . If the ambient sound 2 exceeds the preset decibel value 1, it indicates that the historical environment is a relatively noisy environment; if the environmental sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, it indicates that the current environment is a relatively quiet environment. That is, the phone moves from a noisy environment to a quiet one. In this case, it is very likely that the user will affect the surrounding people due to not switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode in time, and there is switching intention 2 at this time. Similarly, the preset decibel value 2 is smaller than the preset decibel value 1, which can avoid the recognition error of the switching intention caused by the collection error of the ambient sound.
也就是说，若环境音由第二音量范围下降至第一音量范围，则环境信息满足预设条件3。其中，第一音量范围的最大值小于第二音量范围的最小值。That is to say, if the ambient sound drops from the second volume range to the first volume range, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . Wherein, the maximum value of the first volume range is smaller than the minimum value of the second volume range.
反之，若检测到该环境音1超过预设分贝值2，和/或检测到该环境音2未超过预设分贝值1，则表明手机未从嘈杂的环境移动到安静的环境，环境信息不满足预设条件3。该情况下，通常不存在切换意图2。Conversely, if it is detected that the ambient sound 1 exceeds the preset decibel value 2, and/or it is detected that the ambient sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, it indicates that the mobile phone has not moved from a noisy environment to a quiet environment, and the environmental information does not change. Precondition 3 is met. In this case, handover intent 2 usually does not exist.
示例性的，预设分贝值1等于预设分贝值2。若环境音1未超过预设分贝值2，且环境音2未超过预设分贝值1，则表明手机一直处于安静的环境。该情况下，若用户存在切换意图2，理应早已完成切换。采用本实施例中，则将该情况识别为不存在切换意图2的情况。Exemplarily, the preset decibel value 1 is equal to the preset decibel value 2. If the ambient sound 1 does not exceed the preset decibel value 2, and the ambient sound 2 does not exceed the preset decibel value 1, it means that the mobile phone is always in a quiet environment. In this case, if the user has switching intention 2, the switching should have already been completed. In this embodiment, this situation is identified as the situation that there is no handover intention 2 .
采用本实施例的检测方式，可以将手机所处环境从嘈杂到安静变化的情况识别为存在切换意图2的情况。By using the detection method of this embodiment, the situation where the environment of the mobile phone changes from noisy to quiet can be identified as the situation of switching intention 2 .
在一些实施例中，环境信息包括手机所处的环境场所。具体的，该环境场所是最近一次识别出的环境场所，即当前所在环境的环境场所(记为环境场所1)。相应的，手机可获取该环境场所1，检测该环境场所1是否为预设环境场所。其中，预设环境场所可以是路边、车厢、广场等噪音较大的环境场所。若检测到环境场所1不是预设环境场所，则环境信息满足预设条件3。环境场所1不是预设环境场所，则通常需要使用静音模式或者震动模式，避免影响周围的人。该情况下，存在切换意图2。反之，若检测到环境场所1是预设环境场所，则环境信息不满足预设条件3。环境场所1是预设环境场所，则采用静音模式或者震动模式通常会漏接电话。该情况下，通常不存在切换意图2。与场景1中类似，通过环境场所可以准确的识别出存在切换意图2的情况，具体理由可参见场景1中的相关说明。In some embodiments, the environmental information includes the environmental location where the mobile phone is located. Specifically, the environmental location is the latest recognized environmental location, that is, the environmental location of the current environment (denoted as environmental location 1). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can obtain the environmental place 1, and detect whether the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place. Wherein, the preset environmental place may be a noisy environment place such as a roadside, a carriage, or a square. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . If the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place, it is usually necessary to use a silent mode or a vibration mode to avoid affecting people around. In this case, Handover Intent 2 exists. On the contrary, if it is detected that the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place, the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 3 . The environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place, and if the silent mode or the vibration mode is used, the call is usually missed. In this case, handover intent 2 usually does not exist. Similar to Scenario 1, the presence of Switching Intent 2 can be accurately identified through the environment. For specific reasons, please refer to the relevant description in Scenario 1.
或者，该环境场所可以是最近至少两次识别出的环境场所，即当前所在的环境场所(环境场所1)和历史所在的至少一个环境场所(记为环境场所2)。相应的，手机可获取该环境场所1和环境场所2，检测该环境场所1和环境场所2是否为预设环境场所。若检测到环境场所1不是预设环境场所，环境场所2是预设环境场所，则环境信息满足预设条件3。环境场所2是预设环境场所，表明历史所在的环境场所是需要使用响铃提示的环境场所，环境场所1不是预设环境场所，表明当前所在的环境场所是无需使用响铃提示的环境场所。也就是说，手机从需要响铃提示的环境场所移动到了无需响铃提示的环境场所。该情况下，存在切换意图2。也就是说，环境场所由预设类型变化为非预设类型，则环境信息满足预设条件3。其中，预设类型可以是餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、游乐场或者商场等噪音较大的场所。Alternatively, the environmental location may be the environmental location identified at least twice recently, that is, the current environmental location (environmental location 1) and at least one historical location (environmental location 2). Correspondingly, the mobile phone can obtain the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2, and detect whether the environmental place 1 and the environmental place 2 are preset environmental places. If it is detected that the environmental place 1 is not a preset environmental place and the environmental place 2 is a preset environmental place, then the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . Environmental location 2 is the default environmental location, indicating that the environmental location where the history is located is an environmental location that needs to use a ring reminder, and environmental location 1 is not a default environmental location, indicating that the current environmental location is an environmental location that does not need to use a ring reminder. That is to say, the mobile phone has moved from an environmental place where a ringing reminder is required to an environmental place where a ringing reminder is not required. In this case, Handover Intent 2 exists. That is to say, if the environmental place is changed from a preset type to a non-preset type, the environmental information satisfies the preset condition 3 . Wherein, the preset type may be places with relatively loud noises such as restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds, or shopping malls.
反之，若检测到环境场所1是预设环境场所，和/或，环境场所2不是预设环境场所，则环境信息不满足预设条件3。该情况下，表明手机未从需要响铃提示的环境场所移动到无需响铃提示的环境场所，通常不存在切换意图2。如此，手机可以将手机从需要响铃提示的环境场所移动到无需响铃提示的环境场所的情况，识别为存在切换意图2的情况。从而可以提高识别结果的合理性。On the contrary, if it is detected that the environmental place 1 is a preset environmental place, and/or the environmental place 2 is not a preset environmental place, then the environmental information does not satisfy the preset condition 3 . In this case, it indicates that the mobile phone has not moved from an environmental place where a ringing reminder is required to an environmental place where a ringing reminder is not required, and generally there is no switching intention 2 . In this way, the mobile phone can recognize that there is a handover intention 2 when the mobile phone moves from an environmental place where a ringing reminder is required to an environmental place where a ringing reminder is not required. Therefore, the rationality of the recognition result can be improved.
上述分别单独针对各种状态信息和各种环境信息来检测是否满足预设条件3的过程，即识别切换意图2的过程。在实际实施时，为了提高对切换意图2的识别的准确性，手机可以结合至少一种状态信息和至少一种环境信息来识别切换意图2，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。其中，至少一种状态信息包括声音模式1，至少一种环境信息包括环境音1和环境音2。The above-mentioned process of detecting whether the preset condition 3 is satisfied for various status information and various environmental information is the process of identifying the handover intention 2 . In actual implementation, in order to improve the accuracy of identifying the switching intention 2, the mobile phone may identify the switching intention 2 by combining at least one state information and at least one environmental information, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. Wherein, at least one kind of status information includes sound mode 1 , and at least one kind of environmental information includes environmental sound 1 and environmental sound 2 .
示例性的，在各项状态信息和环境信息符合如下表2所示的情况时，才能识别为存在切换意图2。Exemplarily, when each item of state information and environment information conforms to the conditions shown in Table 2 below, it can be recognized that there is a handover intention 2.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2022091028-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022091028-appb-000002
如此，可以在前述所列的多项状态信息和多项环境信息都表明存在切换意图2的情况下，即，仅在切换意图2非常强烈的情况下，才识别为存在切换意图2。In this way, the handover intention 2 may be identified only when the above-listed items of status information and items of environmental information all indicate that the handover intention 2 exists, that is, only when the handover intention 2 is very strong.
在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件3的情况下，则执行S1104，以提示用户切换为静音模式或者震动模式。在检测出状态信息和环境信息不满足预设条件3的情况下，则重复执行S1101。If it is detected that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 3, then execute S1104 to prompt the user to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode. If it is detected that the state information and the environment information do not satisfy the preset condition 3, S1101 is repeatedly executed.
S1104、手机显示切换提示2。其中，该切换提示2用于请求用户确认是否切换为静音模式或者震动模式。S1104. The mobile phone displays a switching prompt 2. Wherein, the switching prompt 2 is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
在场景2中，切换提示2也可以称为第一提示信息。In scene 2, switching prompt 2 may also be referred to as first prompt information.
示例性的，在检测出状态信息和环境信息满足预设条件3的情况下，手机可显示图12示出的锁屏界面1201。该锁屏界面1201中包括切换提示1202，该切换提示1202用于提示切换至静音模式。Exemplarily, when it is detected that the state information and the environment information meet the preset condition 3, the mobile phone may display the lock screen interface 1201 shown in FIG. 12 . The lock screen interface 1201 includes a switching prompt 1202, and the switching prompt 1202 is used to prompt switching to the mute mode.
与场景1中的切换提示1不同的：在场景2中，切换提示2用于提示切换至静音模式或者震动模式。即，模式1是静音模式或者震动模式。相应的，切换提示2中的提示文字、图片或者视频是用于提示切换到静音模式或者震动模式的。以及，与切换提示1中的控件1对应，切换提示2中包括控件3，该控件3用于触发手机切换到静音模式或者震动模式。例如，控件3是图12所示的切换提示1202中的“确认”按钮1203，该“确认”按钮1203用于触发手机切换到静音模式。Different from switching prompt 1 in scene 1: in scene 2, switching prompt 2 is used to prompt switching to silent mode or vibration mode. That is, Mode 1 is a silent mode or a vibration mode. Correspondingly, the prompt text, picture or video in the switching prompt 2 is used to prompt switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode. And, corresponding to the control 1 in the switching prompt 1, the switching prompt 2 includes a control 3, and the control 3 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the silent mode or the vibration mode. For example, the control 3 is the "confirm" button 1203 in the switching prompt 1202 shown in FIG. 12, and the "confirm" button 1203 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the silent mode.
同样的，切换提示2中还可以包括控件4，该控件4用于触发手机取消提示。例如，控件4是图12所示的切换提示1202中的“取消”按钮1204，该“确认”按钮1204用于触发手机切换到静音模式。Similarly, the switching prompt 2 may also include a control 4, which is used to trigger the mobile phone to cancel the prompt. For example, the control 4 is the "cancel" button 1204 in the switching prompt 1202 shown in FIG. 12, and the "confirm" button 1204 is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch to the silent mode.
其中，模式1可以根据用户对震动模式的使用次数或者静音模式的使用次数来确定。例如，若震动模式的使用次数大于或等于静音模式的使用次数，则模式1为震动模式。若震动模式的使用次数小于静音模式的使用次数，则模式1为静音模式。应注意，前面是以大于和等于组合为例来说的，实际上，等于也可以与小于组合，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。如此，可以方便后续快捷的切换到习惯使用的模式。Wherein, mode 1 may be determined according to the number of times the user uses the vibration mode or the number of times the silent mode is used. For example, if the usage times of the vibration mode is greater than or equal to the usage times of the silent mode, mode 1 is the vibration mode. If the number of times the vibration mode is used is less than the number of times the silent mode is used, the mode 1 is the silent mode. It should be noted that the combination of greater than and equal to is used as an example above. In fact, equal to may also be combined with less than, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. In this way, it is convenient and quick to switch to the mode you are used to.
或者，模式1可以根据环境音1来确定。例如，环境音1大于0且小于预设分贝值3时，则模式1为静音模式。从而可以在很安静的环境下，避免干扰周围的人。环境音1大于或等于预设分贝值3且小于预设分贝值2时，则模式1为震动模式。从而可以在相对安静的环境下，尽可能避免干扰周围的人，同时又可以尽量避免用遗漏来电或者通知消息等信息。同样的，前面是以大于和等于组合为例来说的，实际上，等于也可以与小于组合，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。如此，可以方便切换到与环境音相匹配的模式，切换后的模式兼顾对他人的干扰和对用户的提示。Alternatively, Mode 1 may be determined according to Environmental Sound 1 . For example, when the ambient sound 1 is greater than 0 and less than the preset decibel value 3, the mode 1 is the silent mode. In this way, you can avoid disturbing the people around you in a very quiet environment. When the ambient sound 1 is greater than or equal to the preset decibel value 3 and less than the preset decibel value 2, the mode 1 is the vibration mode. Therefore, in a relatively quiet environment, it is possible to avoid disturbing people around as much as possible, and at the same time, it is possible to avoid missing information such as incoming calls or notification messages as much as possible. Similarly, the above is an example of a combination of greater than and equal to. In fact, equal to can also be combined with less than, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. In this way, it is convenient to switch to a mode that matches the ambient sound, and the switched mode takes into account the interference to others and the prompt to the user.
另外，对于S1104中未说明的关于显示切换提示2的部分，可参见场景1的S304中关于显示切换提示1的内容，此处不再赘述。例如，与切换提示1类似，切换提示2也可以显示在锁屏界面、主界面等位置。同样的，若有多条通知消息，则当在锁屏界面中显示切换提示2时，可以将切换提示1显示在前n位。其中，n≥1，n为整数。例如，将切换提示1置顶显示，即n＝1。或者，若在前主界面或者应用界面中显示切换提示2，则当检测到用户正在使用手机时(用户的眼睛正在注视手机屏幕)，手机在主界面或者应用界面中显示切换提示2。In addition, for the part about display switching prompt 2 not described in S1104, please refer to the content about display switching prompt 1 in S304 of scenario 1, which will not be repeated here. For example, similar to the switching prompt 1, the switching prompt 2 may also be displayed on the lock screen interface, the main interface, and the like. Similarly, if there are multiple notification messages, when the switching prompt 2 is displayed on the lock screen interface, the switching prompt 1 may be displayed in the first n positions. Wherein, n≥1, and n is an integer. For example, display switching prompt 1 on top, that is, n=1. Or, if the switching prompt 2 is displayed in the previous main interface or the application interface, then when it is detected that the user is using the mobile phone (the user's eyes are watching the mobile phone screen), the mobile phone displays the switching prompt 2 in the main interface or the application interface.
S1105、手机响应于用户对该切换提示2的操作3，将声音模式切换为静音模式或者震动模式。S1105. The mobile phone switches the sound mode to a silent mode or a vibration mode in response to the user's operation 3 on the switching prompt 2.
在场景2中，操作3也可以称为第一操作。In scenario 2, operation 3 may also be referred to as the first operation.
示例性的，以操作3是用户对切换提示2中控件3的点击操作为例。假设控件3是图12所示的切换提示1202中的“确认”按钮1203。手机响应于用户对该“确认”按钮1203的点击操作，可显示图13中的(a)示出的解锁界面1301。而后，用户通过输入密码、指纹或者扫描人脸解锁成功后，手机可显示图13中的(b)示出的主界面1302，该主界面 1302中的状态栏中显示的是静音模式的图标1303。也就是说，手机响应于用户对控件3的点击操作以及解锁操作，则可将声音模式从响铃模式切换为静音模式或者震动模式。Exemplarily, take operation 3 as an example where the user clicks on control 3 in switching prompt 2 . Assume that control 3 is the "Confirm" button 1203 in the switching prompt 1202 shown in FIG. 12 . In response to the user's click operation on the "Confirm" button 1203, the mobile phone may display the unlocking interface 1301 shown in (a) of FIG. 13 . Then, after the user successfully unlocks by inputting a password, fingerprint or scanning a face, the mobile phone can display the main interface 1302 shown in (b) in FIG. . That is to say, the mobile phone can switch the sound mode from the ring mode to the silent mode or the vibration mode in response to the user's click operation and unlock operation on the control 3 .
应注意，在锁屏界面是手机亮屏后解锁前的界面的情况下，需要用户在执行操作3后，进一步解锁才能触发手机切换声音模式。通过这种方式，需要身份识别后才能切换，可以避免非机主对手机操作，而触发声音模式的切换。It should be noted that when the lock screen interface is the interface before unlocking after the phone is turned on, the user needs to perform operation 3 to further unlock the phone to trigger the phone to switch the sound mode. In this way, the switch can only be performed after identity recognition, which can prevent the non-owner from operating the mobile phone and triggering the switch of the sound mode.
除此之外，若切换提示2显示在人脸解锁后未进入主界面或者应用界面的界面，主界面，或者应用界面，则手机响应于用户对该切换提示2的操作3，可直接将声音模式切换为静音模式或者震动模式，并且可将切换提示2关闭。In addition, if the switching prompt 2 shows that the main interface or the application interface has not been entered after face unlocking, the main interface, or the application interface, the mobile phone can respond to the user's operation 3 on the switching prompt 2, and can directly turn the sound The mode is switched to silent mode or vibration mode, and the switching prompt 2 can be turned off.
前述关于S1105的说明中，仅以一个具体的示例来示出了手机对操作3的响应。对于其余未详细说明的部分，可参见场景1中S305的说明。需要注意的是，在参照时，应以切换提示2替换切换提示1，以操作3替换操作1，以控件3替换控件1以及以响铃模式替换静音模式或者震动模式。In the foregoing description about S1105, only a specific example is used to show the mobile phone's response to operation 3. For other parts that are not described in detail, refer to the description of S305 in Scenario 1. It should be noted that when referring to, switch reminder 1 should be replaced with switch reminder 2, operation 1 should be replaced with operation 3, control 1 should be replaced with control 3, and silent mode or vibration mode should be replaced with ring mode.
S1106、手机响应于预设事件2，关闭切换提示2。其中，手机的声音模式保持不变。S1106. The mobile phone closes the switching prompt 2 in response to the preset event 2. Among them, the sound mode of the mobile phone remains unchanged.
前述关于S1106，可参见场景1中S306的说明。需要注意的是，在参照时，应以预设事件2替换预设事件1，以控件4替换控件2，以及以切换提示2替换切换提示1。For the aforementioned S1106, refer to the description of S306 in Scenario 1. It should be noted that when referring to, the preset event 1 should be replaced with the preset event 2, the control 2 should be replaced with the control 4, and the switching prompt 1 should be replaced with the switching prompt 2.
S1107、在将声音模式切换为静音模式或者震动模式的情况下，手机接收到来电或者通知消息后，静音或震动提示用户。S1107. When the sound mode is switched to the silent mode or the vibration mode, after the mobile phone receives an incoming call or a notification message, the user is notified by mute or vibration.
综上所述，采用本申请实施例的方法，手机可以在监测到可能存在切换声音模式的需求的情况下，识别用户是否存在切换意图2。从而可以有针对性的识别，有利于降低手机功耗。进一步的，手机根据状态信息和环境来识别是否存在切换意图2，可以提高识别结果的准确性。在识别出存在切换意图2的情况下，手机在锁屏界面或者主界面等位置处显示切换提示2，以提示用户切换到静音模式或者震动模式；并且，用户操作该切换提示2可触发手机切换到静音模式或者震动模式。如此，手机可以为有切换意图2的用户提供便捷的切换入口。从而可以快速切换至静音模式或者震动模式。在切换为静音模式或者震动模式，手机则可静音或者以震动来提示来电或者通知消息等信息，避免干扰周围的人。To sum up, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone can identify whether the user has switching intention 2 when detecting that there may be a need to switch the sound mode. Therefore, targeted identification can be performed, which is beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the mobile phone. Further, the mobile phone identifies whether there is a switching intention 2 according to the status information and the environment, which can improve the accuracy of the identification result. When it is recognized that there is a switching intention 2, the mobile phone displays a switching prompt 2 on the lock screen interface or the main interface, etc., to prompt the user to switch to the silent mode or vibration mode; and, the user operates the switching prompt 2 to trigger the mobile phone to switch to silent mode or vibrate mode. In this way, the mobile phone can provide a convenient switching entry for users with switching intention 2 . In this way, you can quickly switch to silent mode or vibration mode. After switching to silent mode or vibration mode, the mobile phone can mute or vibrate to prompt information such as incoming calls or notification messages to avoid disturbing people around.
与场景1中类似，在前文场景2的实施例中，在检测到手机的状态(如状态信息)和手机所处的环境(如环境信息)满足预设条件2的情况下，则向用户推送切换提示(如切换提示2)。而实际中，不同用户对切换提示的需求对不同，例如，对于日常不会切换声音模式的用户而言，其对切换提示没有需求。基于此，在另一些实施例中，为了实现有针对性的推送。具体的，如图14所示，在S1103之前，还包括S1401：S1401、手机检测用户画像是否满足预设条件4。若是，则执行S1103；若否，则重复执行S1101。Similar to Scenario 1, in the previous embodiment of Scenario 2, when it is detected that the status of the mobile phone (such as status information) and the environment of the mobile phone (such as environmental information) meet the preset condition 2, the user will be pushed Toggle hints (eg Toggle hint 2). In practice, different users have different needs for switching prompts. For example, for users who do not switch sound modes on a daily basis, they have no need for switching prompts. Based on this, in other embodiments, in order to achieve targeted push. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 , before S1103 , S1401 is also included: S1401, the mobile phone detects whether the user portrait satisfies preset condition 4. If yes, execute S1103; if not, execute S1101 repeatedly.
在场景2中，预设条件4也可以称为第二预设条件。In scenario 2, preset condition 4 may also be called a second preset condition.
与前文S1001的不同的是：在S1401中，电子设备需要确定用户是否为推送切换提示2的目标用户。其中，电子设备可以通过以下几个维度的用户画像来确定：The difference from the foregoing S1001 is that: in S1401, the electronic device needs to determine whether the user is the target user for pushing the switching prompt 2. Among them, electronic devices can be identified by user portraits in the following dimensions:
维度一，用户画像包括手机在第一预设时间段内响应于用户的操作切换声音模式的次数1(也可以称为第一次数)。若次数1超过预设次数1(也可以称为第一预设次数)，则用户画像满足预设条件4。反之，若次数1未超过预设次数1(也可以称为第一预设次数)，则用户画像不满足预设条件4。关于该维度一，可参见S1001中的相关说明。 Dimension 1, the user profile includes the number 1 (also referred to as the first time number) of switching the sound mode of the mobile phone in response to the user's operation within the first preset time period. If the number of times 1 exceeds the preset number of times 1 (also referred to as the first preset number of times), the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 4 . On the contrary, if the number of times 1 does not exceed the preset number of times 1 (also referred to as the first preset number of times), the user profile does not satisfy the preset condition 4 . Regarding the dimension one, please refer to the relevant description in S1001.
维度二，用户画像包括手机在第四预设时间段内，在环境音小于预设分贝值2的情况 下，响应于用户的操作切换到静音模式或者震动模式的次数5(也可以称为第三次数)。若次数5超过预设次数5(也可以称为第三预设次数)，则表明用户倾向在安静的环境下采用静音模式或者震动模式，则用户画像满足预设条件4。反之，若次数5未超过预设次数5，则用户画像不满足预设条件4。该维度二的实现原理，与S1001中对次数2的检测和判定过程是相似的，此处不再赘述。 Dimension 2, the user portrait includes the number 5 times the mobile phone switches to silent mode or vibration mode in response to user operations when the ambient sound is less than the preset decibel value 2 within the fourth preset time period (also referred to as the first three times). If the number of times 5 exceeds the preset number of times 5 (also referred to as the third preset number of times), it indicates that the user tends to use the silent mode or the vibration mode in a quiet environment, and the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 4 . On the contrary, if the number of times 5 does not exceed the preset number of times 5, the user portrait does not meet the preset condition 4 . The implementation principle of the second dimension is similar to the detection and determination process of the number of times 2 in S1001, and will not be repeated here.
维度三，用户画像包括手机在第三预设时间段内响应于操作3切换声音模式的次数6(也可以称为第二次数)。若次数6超过预设次数6(也可以称为第二预设次数)，则该用户对通过切换提示2切换声音模式的接受度较高，此时用户画像满足预设条件4。反之，若次数6未超过预设次数6，则用户画像不满足预设条件4，该用户不是目标用户。该维度三的实现原理，与S1001中对次数4的检测和判定过程是相似的，此处不再赘述。 Dimension 3, the user portrait includes the number 6 (also referred to as the second number) of switching the sound mode of the mobile phone in response to the operation 3 within the third preset time period. If the number of times 6 exceeds the preset number of times 6 (also referred to as the second preset number of times), then the user has a higher acceptance of switching the voice mode through the switching prompt 2, and the user portrait satisfies the preset condition 4 at this time. On the contrary, if the number of times 6 does not exceed the preset number of times 6, the user profile does not meet the preset condition 4, and the user is not a target user. The implementation principle of dimension three is similar to the detection and determination process of the number of times 4 in S1001, and will not be repeated here.
前文是分别针对场景1和场景2来说明本申请方案的。而在实际实施时，针对场景1和场景2的方案可能并不是完全独立的。示例性的，如图15所示，实际实施时，本申请方案如下：手机可以初步确定当前是否可能存在切换声音模式的需求(如S301)。若初步确定存在切换声音模式的需求，手机可获取状态信息和环境信息(如S302)。而后，手机可确定该用户是否为目标用户(如可同时采用S1001和S1401来确定，对应图15中的S1501，预设条件5包括预设条件2和预设条件4)。针对目标用户，手机可同时(图15中未示出)或者先后(图15中示出的是先后的方式)检测状态信息和环境信息是否满足预设条件1(如S303)，和检测状态信息和环境信息是否满足预设条件2(如S1103)。若检测出满足预设条件1，则显示切换提示1(如S304)；若检测出满足预设条件2，则显示切换提示2(如S1104)。若既不满足预设条件1，也不满足预设条件2，则重新确定是否可能存在切换声音模式的需求(如S301或者S401)。在显示切换提示(如切换提示1或者切换提示2)后，手机则可根据用户对切换提示(如切换提示1或者切换提示2)的操作来切换声音模式。如此，则可以灵活的根据用户的切换意图便捷的切换到相应的声音模式，而不仅仅只能切换到响铃模式，或者只能切换到静音模式或者震动模式。The foregoing describes the solution of this application for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 respectively. However, in actual implementation, the solutions for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 may not be completely independent. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 15 , in actual implementation, the solution of the present application is as follows: the mobile phone may preliminarily determine whether there may be a need to switch sound modes at present (such as S301 ). If it is preliminarily determined that there is a need to switch the sound mode, the mobile phone may obtain status information and environment information (eg S302). Then, the mobile phone can determine whether the user is the target user (for example, S1001 and S1401 can be used to determine simultaneously, corresponding to S1501 in FIG. 15 , preset condition 5 includes preset condition 2 and preset condition 4). For the target user, the mobile phone can simultaneously (not shown in FIG. 15 ) or sequentially (shown in FIG. 15 is a sequential manner) check whether the state information and environmental information meet the preset condition 1 (such as S303), and detect the status information and whether the environment information satisfies the preset condition 2 (such as S1103). If it is detected that the preset condition 1 is met, a switching prompt 1 is displayed (eg S304); if it is detected that the preset condition 2 is met, a switching prompt 2 is displayed (eg S1104). If neither the preset condition 1 nor the preset condition 2 is satisfied, it is re-determined whether there may be a need to switch the sound mode (such as S301 or S401). After displaying the switching prompt (such as switching prompt 1 or switching prompt 2), the mobile phone can switch the sound mode according to the user's operation on the switching prompt (such as switching prompt 1 or switching prompt 2). In this way, it is possible to flexibly and conveniently switch to the corresponding sound mode according to the switching intention of the user, instead of only switching to the ringing mode, or only switching to the silent mode or the vibration mode.
本申请另一些实施例提供了一种电子设备，该电子设备可以包括：上述显示屏(如触摸屏)、存储器和一个或多个处理器。该显示屏、存储器和处理器耦合。该存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当处理器执行计算机指令时，电子设备可执行上述方法实施例中的各个功能或者步骤。该电子设备的结构可以参考图2所示的手机200的结构。Some other embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, which may include: the above-mentioned display screen (such as a touch screen), a memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps in the foregoing method embodiments. For the structure of the electronic device, reference may be made to the structure of the mobile phone 200 shown in FIG. 2 .
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片***，如图16所示，该芯片***1600包括至少一个处理器1601和至少一个接口电路1602。处理器1601和接口电路1602可通过线路互联。例如，接口电路1602可用于从其它装置(例如电子设备的存储器)接收信号。又例如，接口电路1602可用于向其它装置(例如处理器1601)发送信号。示例性的，接口电路1602可读取存储器中存储的指令，并将该指令发送给处理器1601。当所述指令被处理器1601执行时，可使得电子设备执行上述实施例中的各个步骤。当然，该芯片***还可以包含其他分立器件，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, as shown in FIG. 16 , the chip system 1600 includes at least one processor 1601 and at least one interface circuit 1602 . The processor 1601 and the interface circuit 1602 may be interconnected through wires. For example, interface circuit 1602 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as memory of an electronic device. As another example, the interface circuit 1602 may be used to send signals to other devices (such as the processor 1601). Exemplarily, the interface circuit 1602 can read instructions stored in the memory, and send the instructions to the processor 1601 . When the instructions are executed by the processor 1601, the electronic device may be made to execute various steps in the foregoing embodiments. Of course, the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质，该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在上述电子设备上运行时，使得该电子设备执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform the various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiment .
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the method embodiment above.
通过以上实施方式的描述，所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example for illustration. In practical applications, the above functions can be assigned by Completion of different functional modules means that the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed devices and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components can be Incorporation or may be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented. In another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The unit described as a separate component may or may not be physically separated, and the component displayed as a unit may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, it may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places . Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机，芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the software product is stored in a storage medium Among them, several instructions are included to make a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes such as U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk.
以上内容，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above content is only the specific implementation of the application, but the protection scope of the application is not limited thereto, and any changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in the application shall be covered within the protection scope of the application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be determined by the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (16)

  1. 一种声音模式的切换方法，其特征在于，包括：A method for switching sound modes, characterized in that, comprising:
    电子设备获取所述电子设备的声音模式和所述电子设备当前的场景信息；其中，所述声音模式为静音模式、震动模式或响铃模式；所述场景信息包括所述电子设备所处环境的环境音；The electronic device obtains the sound mode of the electronic device and the current scene information of the electronic device; wherein, the sound mode is a silent mode, a vibration mode or a ringing mode; the scene information includes the environment where the electronic device is located ambient sound;
    在所述声音模式为所述静音模式或所述震动模式的情况下，若所述场景信息满足第一预设条件，所述电子设备则显示第一提示信息；其中，所述场景信息满足第一预设条件包括：所述环境音由第一音量范围上升至第二音量范围内；所述第一提示信息用于请求用户确认是否切换为所述响铃模式；When the sound mode is the silent mode or the vibration mode, if the scene information satisfies a first preset condition, the electronic device displays first prompt information; wherein, the scene information satisfies a first preset condition. A preset condition includes: the ambient sound rises from the first volume range to the second volume range; the first prompt message is used to request the user to confirm whether to switch to the ringing mode;
    所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第一提示信息的第一操作，将所述声音模式切换为所述响铃模式。The electronic device switches the sound mode to the ringing mode in response to a user's first operation on the first prompt information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述场景信息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述电子设备是否连接了可穿戴设备；其中，所述可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个；The method according to claim 1, wherein the scene information further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is connected to a wearable device; wherein, the wearable The device includes at least one of a wristband, earphones, smartwatch, and smartglasses;
    所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：所述第一指示信息指示所述电子设备未连接所述可穿戴设备。The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the first indication information indicates that the electronic device is not connected to the wearable device.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述场景信息还包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述可穿戴设备是否佩戴在用户身上；其中，所述可穿戴设备包括手环、耳机、智能手表和智能眼镜中的至少一个；The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the scene information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the wearable device is worn on the user; wherein, the The wearable device includes at least one of a bracelet, earphones, smart watch and smart glasses;
    所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：所述第二指示信息指示所述可穿戴设备未佩戴在用户身上。The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the second indication information indicating that the wearable device is not worn by the user.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述场景信息还包括第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述电子设备是否正处于使用状态；所述电子设备正处于使用状态包括：所述电子设备处于亮屏状态；和/或，所述电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视所述电子设备的屏幕；和/或，所述电子设备检测到用户对所述电子设备的屏幕的触控操作；和/或，所述电子设备检测到所述环境的光线强度大于第一预设强度，且所述电子设备的加速度小于预设加速度；The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the scene information further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the electronic device is in use; The electronic device being in use includes: the electronic device is in a bright screen state; and/or, the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects The user's touch operation on the screen of the electronic device; and/or, the electronic device detects that the light intensity of the environment is greater than a first preset intensity, and the acceleration of the electronic device is less than a preset acceleration;
    所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：所述第三指示信息指示所述电子设备未处于使用状态。The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes: the third indication information indicating that the electronic device is not in use.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述场景信息还包括所述环境所属的环境类型，所述环境类型包括会议室、办公室、医院、餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、电影院、游乐场和商场中的多种；The method according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the scene information further includes the environment type to which the environment belongs, and the environment type includes conference room, office, hospital, restaurant, carriage, road Sides, squares, cinemas, playgrounds and shopping malls;
    所述场景信息满足所述第一预设条件还包括：The scene information meeting the first preset condition further includes:
    所述环境类型由非预设类型变化为预设类型；其中，所述预设类型包括餐厅、车厢、路边、广场、游乐场和/或商场。The environment type is changed from a non-preset type to a preset type; wherein, the preset type includes restaurants, carriages, roadsides, squares, playgrounds and/or shopping malls.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述电子设备获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息之前，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备监测所述电子设备所在环境的第一环境参数；其中，所述第一环境参数包括Wi-Fi连接情况、Wi-Fi列表和/或光线强度；The electronic device monitors first environmental parameters of the environment where the electronic device is located; wherein the first environmental parameters include Wi-Fi connection status, Wi-Fi list and/or light intensity;
    其中，所述获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息，包括：Wherein, the acquisition of the current scene information of the electronic device includes:
    在所述第一环境参数发生预设变化的情况下，获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息；Acquiring current scene information of the electronic device when a preset change occurs to the first environmental parameter;
    其中，所述第一环境参数发生预设变化，包括：Wherein, the first environmental parameter undergoes a preset change, including:
    所述电子设备从与第一Wi-Fi处于连接状态变化为与所述第一Wi-Fi断开连接，或者，所述电子设备从与第二Wi-Fi处于断开状态变化为与所述第二Wi-Fi连接，其中，所述第一Wi-Fi和所述第二Wi-Fi可以是任一Wi-Fi；和/或，The electronic device changes from being connected to the first Wi-Fi to being disconnected from the first Wi-Fi, or, the electronic device changes from being disconnected from the second Wi-Fi to being connected to the A second Wi-Fi connection, wherein the first Wi-Fi and the second Wi-Fi can be any Wi-Fi; and/or,
    所述电子设备扫描到的Wi-Fi列表由第一Wi-Fi列表变化为第二Wi-Fi列表，所述第一Wi-Fi列表和所述第二Wi-Fi列表存在至少一个不同的Wi-Fi；和/或，The Wi-Fi list scanned by the electronic device is changed from the first Wi-Fi list to the second Wi-Fi list, and there is at least one different Wi-Fi in the first Wi-Fi list and the second Wi-Fi list. -Fi; and/or,
    所述电子设备所处环境的光线强度由第一强度值变化为第二强度值，所述第一强度值和所述第二强度值的差值的绝对值超过预设值。The light intensity of the environment where the electronic device is located changes from a first intensity value to a second intensity value, and an absolute value of a difference between the first intensity value and the second intensity value exceeds a preset value.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述电子设备获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息之前，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein before the electronic device obtains the current scene information of the electronic device, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备监测所述电子设备在第一预设时间内是否存在漏接的电话；The electronic device monitors whether there is a missed call within the first preset time;
    其中，所述获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息，包括：Wherein, the acquisition of the current scene information of the electronic device includes:
    在所述电子设备在第一预设时间段内存在漏接的电话的情况下，获取所述电子设备当前的场景信息。If there is a missed call in the electronic device within the first preset time period, the current scene information of the electronic device is acquired.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述漏接的电话不包括被标记骚扰标识的电话和/或所述黑名单中的电话。The method according to claim 7, wherein the missed calls do not include calls marked as harassment and/or calls in the blacklist.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述电子设备显示所述第一提示信息之前，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein before the electronic device displays the first prompt information, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备获取用户的用户画像；其中，所述用户画像包括第一次数，所述第一次数为所述电子设备在第二预设时间段内响应于用户的操作切换声音模式的次数；The electronic device acquires a user portrait of the user; wherein, the user portrait includes a first number, and the first number is the number of times the electronic device switches the sound mode in response to the user's operation within a second preset time period. frequency;
    所述电子设备确定所述用户画像满足第二预设条件；其中，所述用户画像满足第二预设条件，包括：所述第一次数大于第一预设次数。The electronic device determines that the user portrait satisfies a second preset condition; wherein, the user portrait satisfies the second preset condition, including: the first count is greater than the first preset count.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述用户画像还包括第二次数，所述第二次数为所述电子设备在所述第三预设时间段内响应于所述第一操作切换声音模式的次数；The method according to claim 9, wherein the user profile further includes a second number of times that the electronic device responds to the first operation within the third preset time period. Number of times to switch sound modes;
    所述用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：所述第二次数大于第二预设次数。The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the second count is greater than the second preset count.
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述用户画像还包括第三次数，所述第三次数为所述电子设备在第四预设时间段内，在环境音大于第一分贝的情况下，响应于用户的操作切换到响铃模式的次数；The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the user portrait further includes a third number of times, the third time is that the electronic device has an ambient sound greater than the first time period within the fourth preset time period. In the case of decibels, the number of times the user switches to ring mode in response to an action by the user;
    所述用户画像满足第二预设条件还包括：所述第三次数大于第三预设次数。The user portrait meeting the second preset condition further includes: the third count is greater than the third preset count.
  12. 根据权利要求9-11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：若所述用户画像不满足第二预设条件，所述电子设备不显示所述第一提示信息。The method according to any one of claims 9-11, further comprising: if the user portrait does not meet the second preset condition, the electronic device does not display the first prompt information .
  13. 根据权利要求1-12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述电子设备显示所述第一提示信息，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-12, wherein the electronic device displaying the first prompt information includes:
    所述电子设备在所述电子设备的锁屏界面中显示所述第一提示信息；其中，若存在多条通知消息，所述电子设备将所述第一提示信息置顶显示。The electronic device displays the first prompt information on a lock screen interface of the electronic device; wherein, if there are multiple notification messages, the electronic device displays the first prompt information on top.
  14. 根据权利要求1-12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述电子设备显示所述第 一提示信息，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-12, wherein the electronic device displays the first prompt information, comprising:
    在所述电子设备当前显示的界面是所述电子设备的主界面或者应用界面的情况下，当所述电子设备检测到用户的瞳孔正在注视所述电子设备的屏幕时，所述电子设备显示所述第一提示信息。When the interface currently displayed by the electronic device is the main interface or application interface of the electronic device, when the electronic device detects that the user's pupils are looking at the screen of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the the first prompt message.
  15. 一种电子设备，其特征在于，所述电子设备支持静音模式、震动模式和响铃模式，所述电子设备包括显示屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器；所述显示屏、所述存储器和所述处理器耦合；所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device supports a silent mode, a vibration mode and a ringing mode, and the electronic device includes a display screen, a memory and one or more processors; the display screen, the memory and The processor is coupled; the memory is used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is executed as claimed in claims 1-14. any one of the methods described.
  16. 一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，其特征在于，当所述指令在电子设备上运行时，使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, wherein when the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute any one of claims 1-14. method described in the item.
PCT/CN2022/091028 2021-08-27 2022-05-05 Method for switching sound mode, and electronic device WO2023024565A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110998713.1A CN115720248A (en) 2021-08-27 2021-08-27 Sound mode switching method and electronic equipment
CN202110998713.1 2021-08-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023024565A1 true WO2023024565A1 (en) 2023-03-02

Family

ID=85253709

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/091028 WO2023024565A1 (en) 2021-08-27 2022-05-05 Method for switching sound mode, and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115720248A (en)
WO (1) WO2023024565A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116167106A (en) * 2023-04-25 2023-05-26 深圳市爱保护科技有限公司 Smart watch display method and system, storage medium and smart terminal

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117478784A (en) * 2023-12-27 2024-01-30 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 Incoming call mode switching method, device, equipment and storage medium

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104023121A (en) * 2014-04-30 2014-09-03 小米科技有限责任公司 Mode switching method and device
CN106303088A (en) * 2016-09-30 2017-01-04 努比亚技术有限公司 Prompting control method and mobile terminal
CN106453860A (en) * 2016-09-26 2017-02-22 广东小天才科技有限公司 Switching method and device of sound mode and user terminal
US20170187866A1 (en) * 2015-10-17 2017-06-29 Eric Qing Li Automatic Volume Control Based on Context and Location
CN107172302A (en) * 2017-07-05 2017-09-15 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 Audio control method and device, computer installation and computer-readable recording medium
CN108712578A (en) * 2018-08-28 2018-10-26 国人（江苏）智能通讯科技有限公司 A kind of method and apparatus that communication tool pattern automatically switches
CN110881075A (en) * 2018-09-06 2020-03-13 奇酷互联网络科技（深圳）有限公司 Intelligent terminal, reminding mode selection method thereof and device with storage function

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101997979B (en) * 2010-10-21 2014-04-30 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for switching scene modes of mobile terminal
CN105721715B (en) * 2016-04-27 2020-04-07 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Contextual model switching method, contextual model switching device and terminal
CN106534583A (en) * 2016-12-14 2017-03-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Terminal management method and equipment
CN109672787A (en) * 2019-02-18 2019-04-23 重庆蓝岸通讯技术有限公司 A kind of device intelligence based reminding method
CN110365835A (en) * 2019-06-04 2019-10-22 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 A kind of response method, mobile terminal and computer storage medium

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104023121A (en) * 2014-04-30 2014-09-03 小米科技有限责任公司 Mode switching method and device
US20170187866A1 (en) * 2015-10-17 2017-06-29 Eric Qing Li Automatic Volume Control Based on Context and Location
CN106453860A (en) * 2016-09-26 2017-02-22 广东小天才科技有限公司 Switching method and device of sound mode and user terminal
CN106303088A (en) * 2016-09-30 2017-01-04 努比亚技术有限公司 Prompting control method and mobile terminal
CN107172302A (en) * 2017-07-05 2017-09-15 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 Audio control method and device, computer installation and computer-readable recording medium
CN108712578A (en) * 2018-08-28 2018-10-26 国人（江苏）智能通讯科技有限公司 A kind of method and apparatus that communication tool pattern automatically switches
CN110881075A (en) * 2018-09-06 2020-03-13 奇酷互联网络科技（深圳）有限公司 Intelligent terminal, reminding mode selection method thereof and device with storage function

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116167106A (en) * 2023-04-25 2023-05-26 深圳市爱保护科技有限公司 Smart watch display method and system, storage medium and smart terminal
CN116167106B (en) * 2023-04-25 2023-08-01 深圳市爱保护科技有限公司 Smart watch display method and system, storage medium and smart terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115720248A (en) 2023-02-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2023024565A1 (en) Method for switching sound mode, and electronic device
CN105049923B (en) Wake up the method and device of electronic equipment
US10819840B2 (en) Voice communication method
EP3610363A2 (en) Voice communication method
KR20180107296A (en) Reduced-size interfaces for managing alerts
US20220103675A1 (en) Dynamic User Interface Schemes for an Electronic Device Based on Detected Accessory Devices
KR20140113118A (en) Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
JP7468830B2 (en) Energy efficient display processing method and device - Patents.com
CN109151180A (en) A kind of object identifying method and mobile terminal
US11240365B1 (en) Dynamic user interface schemes for an electronic device based on detected accessory devices
US11765114B2 (en) Voice communication method
CN109938720A (en) Based reminding method, wearable device and computer readable storage medium based on heart rate
CN112650405B (en) Interaction method of electronic equipment and electronic equipment
WO2021213151A1 (en) Display control method and wearable device
CN110022401A (en) A kind of control parameter setting method, terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN108966323A (en) A kind of bright screen control method and device, terminal
WO2023088209A1 (en) Cross-device audio data transmission method and electronic devices
US20230319413A1 (en) User interfaces for camera sharing
WO2020221062A1 (en) Navigation operation method and electronic device
CN109871253A (en) A kind of display methods and terminal
CN110312035A (en) A kind of control method of terminal, mobile terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN107203264A (en) The control method of display pattern, device, electronic equipment
WO2020103091A9 (en) Touch operation locking method and electronic device
WO2016206066A1 (en) Method, apparatus and intelligent terminal for controlling intelligent terminal mode
CN109743448A (en) Reminding method and terminal device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22859915

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE